Citroën C5 01/07/2011 - 31/05/2012 Owner Manual

Document

OWNER'S HANDBOOK

YOUR HANDBOOK

ON THE INTERNET!

CITROËN lets you view your vehicle's documentation on line, to see earlier versions and the latest information, simply and free of charge.

Connect to

http://service.citroen.com

1 |

Select your language and register,

2 |

click on the link in the "Private customer access" zone to consult the vehicle documentation; a window opens providing access to all of the handbooks,

3 |

select your vehicle, choose the body type then the date of issue of the handbook,

4 |

fi nally, click on the heading of your choice.

We draw your attention to the following...

Your vehicle is fi tted with only some of the equipment described in this document, depending on the trim level, version and the speci fi cations for the country in which it is sold.

The fi tting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by CITROËN may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system. Please note this speci fi c warning and contact a CITROËN dealer to be shown the recommended equipment and accessories.

CITROËN has a presence on every continent, a complete product range, bringing together technology and a permanent spirit of innovation, for a modern and creative approach to mobility.

We thank you and congratulate you on your choice.

Key

safety warning

contributes to the protection of the environment

refer to the page indicated

At the wheel of your new vehicle, getting to know each system, each control, each setting, makes your trips, your journeys more comfortable and more enjoyable.

Happy motoring!

C O N T E N T S

FAMILIARISATION

ECO-DRIVING

4

24

23

25 I - MONITORING 26

42

Instrument panels

Trip computer

Warning and indicator lamps 32

Adjustment buttons 42

II - MULTIFUNCTION

SCREENS 43

48

Monochrome screen C 43

16/9 colour screen (MyWay) 45

16/9 high de fi nition colour screen

(NaviDrive 3D) 47

III - COMFORT 49

68

Ventilation 49

Mono-zone digital air conditioning

Dual-zone digital

51 air conditioning

Programmable heating

Front seats

Rear seats

Mirrors 67

Steering wheel adjustment 68

IV - ACCESS 69

87

Remote control key 69

Alarm 75

Electric windows 77

Doors 79

Boot 81

Sunroof (Saloon) 84

Panoramic sunroof (Tourer)

Fuel tank

Misfuel prevention (Diesel)

V - VISIBILITY 88

99

Lighting controls

Automatic illumination of

88 headlamps 90

Headlamp adjustment 91

Directional lighting

Wiper controls

Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers

Courtesy lamps

Interior mood lighting

VI - FITTINGS 100

106

Interior fi ttings 100

Mats 101

Front armrest 101

Boot fi ttings 103

VII - CHILD SAFETY 107

115

Child seats

ISOFIX child seats

Child lock

107

111

115

C O N T E N T S

VIII - SAFETY 116

127

Direction indicators

Hazard warning lamps

116

Horn 116

Emergency or assistance call 116

Tyre under-in fl ation detection 117

Braking assistance systems 119

Trajectory control systems 120

Seat belts 121

Airbags 124

X - CHECKS 163

175

Bonnet 164

Running out of fuel (Diesel) 166

Petrol engines

Diesel engines

167

169

Checking levels 172

Checks 174

XII - TECHNICAL

DATA 209

224

Petrol engines

Petrol weights

Diesel engines

Diesel weights

209

210

212

214

Diesel weights - commercial versions (Tourer) 218

Dimensions 219

Identi fi cation markings 223

IX - DRIVING 128

162

Parking brake

Electric parking brake

Hill start assist

Automatic gearbox

Fixed centred controls steering wheel

128

129

136

Manual gearbox

Gear shift indicator

137

138

6-speed electronic gearbox system 139

Stop & Start 143

146

150

Speed limiter

Cruise control

152

154

Lane departure warning system 156

Parking space sensor

Parking sensors

157

159

"Hydractive III +" electronic suspension 160

XI - PRACTICAL

INFORMATION 176

208

Temporary puncture repair kit

Changing a wheel

176

179

Changing a bulb

Changing a fuse

183

193

Battery 198

Energy economy mode

Towing the vehicle

Towing a trailer

Roof bars

Very cold protection

Cold climate screen

200

201

202

203

204

205

Matt paint 206

Accessories 207

XIII - AUDIO and

TELEMATICS 225

324

Emergency or assistance 225

NaviDrive 3D 229

MyWay 273

Audio system 305

VISUAL

SEARCH

ALPHABETICAL

INDEX

325

331

330

336

E X T E R I O R

Stop & Start

This system puts the engine temporarily into standby during stops in the traf fi c (red lights, traf fi c jams, etc...).

The engine restarts automatically as soon as you want to move off.

Stop & Start reduces fuel consumption, exhaust emissions and noise when stationary.

Xenon dual-function directional headlamps

This system automatically provides you with extra visibility on bends.

This lighting is linked with the cornering lighting which maximises the illuminated area at intersections and when parking.

Panoramic sunroof (Tourer)

This provides you with perfect brightness in the passenger compartment.

Glass sunroof (Saloon)

This also provides you with improved ventilation in the passenger compartment.

84-85

143

Lane departure warning system

This driving aid warns you when you cross a lane marking unintentionally.

Parking sensors (visual + audible)

This system warns you if an obstacle is detected in front of or behind the vehicle.

156 159

Tyre under-in fl ation detection

This system checks the pressure of the tyres automatically while driving.

117

Remote control key

A C C E S S

Opening the boot Fuel tank

Key release/storage.

Normal locking of the vehicle (a single press) or deadlocking the vehicle (two presses in succession).

Guide-me-home lighting.

Unlocking the vehicle.

To open the fuel fi ller

Locking filler cap

fl ap, press on it at top left, then pull from the rear edge.

) Press upwards on lever E .

The boot automatically locks when the vehicle is moving at a speed of over mph (10 central locking is deactivated. It is unlocked when a door is opened or when the central locking button is pressed

(speed lower than 6 mph (10 km/h)).

) Turn the key a quarter turn to lock and unlock the fi ller cap.

When refuelling, place the cap on hook F .

Tank capacity: approximately 71 litres.

81-82

Opening the bonnet

A C C E S S

Spare wheel Access to the spare wheel

To access the spare wheel:

) Lift up the boot fl oor and fold it in two (Saloon) or hook it using the retractable handle (Tourer).

) Attach the hook to the upper section of the boot.

) To remove the spare wheel, detach the strap then push the wheel forwards, before lifting it out.

Temporary puncture repair kit

The bonnet release should only be operated when the vehicle is stationary.

) Open the driver's door.

) Pull release lever A to unlock.

Saloon

) Lift safety catch , then raise the bonnet.

164

Tourer

The tools are to be found in a protective holder inside the spare wheel.

The kit is a complete system including a compressor and a sealant cartridge.

176

179

Dual-zone digital air conditioning

This air conditioning system enables you to adjust the comfort levels of the driver and the front passenger independently.

I N T E R I O R

Audio and communication systems

These systems bene fi t from the latest technology: MP3 compatible audio system, Bluetooth ® system, NaviDrive 3D, MyWay.

225

Parking space sensor

The "Parking space sensor" function assists you in fi nding a parking space.

157

Electric parking brake

The electric parking brake combines automatic application when the engine is switched off, and automatic release when the vehicle is set in motion (automatic function activated by default).

Manual locking/unlocking is possible.

129

I N S T R U M E N T S A N D C O N T R O L S

Electric windows/door mirrors/child safety controls.

Memorisation of driver’s seat settings.

Bonnet release.

Steering mounted controls:

- Speed limiter

- Cruise control

Horn.

Audio/telematic steering mounted controls.

Driver's airbag.

Navigation controls for the audio/telematics and trip computer systems.

Driver's air vent.

10.

Instrument panel.

11.

Driver's air vent.

12.

Stop & Start control.

13.

Windscreen wiper/screenwash control stalk.

14.

Ignition switch.

15.

ESP/parking sensors/lane departure warning system controls.

16.

Steering column adjustment.

17.

Knee airbag.

18.

Oddments tray or programmable heater controls.

19.

Checks/Anti-intrusion alarm/Parking space sensor controls.

20.

Lighting/Direction indicators/Foglamp/Voice recognition control stalk.

21.

Manual headlamp height adjustment.

I N S T R U M E N T S A N D C O N T R O L S

Sunshine sensor.

Soft diffusion air conditioning adjustment knob.

Passenger's airbag.

Side window demister.

Switch using the ignition key in the glovebox:

- Passenger’s airbag activation/deactivation

Passenger's air vents.

Hazard warning lamps switch.

Glovebox:

- Vehicle document storage

- Audio-video sockets

Doors and boot locking/unlocking control.

10.

Automatic gearbox SPORT/SNOW mode controls.

11.

Electric parking brake.

12.

USB port.

13.

Armrest with cup-holder.

14.

Suspension controls:

- Ground clearance adjustment

- Sport mode

15.

Ashtray with cigarette lighter.

16.

Gear lever.

17.

Storage.

18.

Audio and telematics system.

19.

Air conditioning controls.

20.

Storage.

21.

Multifunction screen.

22.

Emergency or assistance call.

I N S T R U M E N T S A N D C O N T R O L S

Instrument panel menu. Multifunction screen menu.

Activation of voice recognition or reminder of navigation guidance.

Cruise control and speed limiter.

MODE: selection of the type of information displayed in multifunction screen.

Telephone.

Audio.

The " " buttons have touch identi fi cation to make them easier to use.

150-151

Front seats

Manual adjustments

S I T T I N G C O M F O R T A B L Y

Seat belt height adjustment

Electric adjustments

Adjustment of the backrest angle.

Adjustment of the seat height.

Heated seat control.

Longitudinal adjustment of the seat.

Adjustment of the backrest lumbar support.

Seat cushion height, angle and longitudinal adjustments.

Massage function.

The correct position of the upper seat belt anchorage places the belt across the middle of the shoulder.

Adjustment of the backrest angle.

Adjustment of top of backrest.

Adjustment of lumbar support, height and level.

) To adjust the seat belt for height, compress the control and slide it in the desired direction.

122

Heated seat control.

Storing

This function allows you to programme and store the driver’s seat and air conditioning settings.

Electric door mirrors

S I T T I N G C O M F O R T A B L Y

Electrochromatic rear view mirror

Steering column adjustment

Selection of door mirror:

Left hand side.

Right hand side.

Foldback/Unfold.

Directional control for mirror selected .

Automatic day/night model

Automatic detection of the day/night mode.

Adjustment of the mirror.

) Release the steering wheel by push-

A forwards.

) Adjust the height and the reach of the steering wheel, then lock the position by pulling the lever upwards.

As a safety precaution, these operations must not be carried out while moving.

V I S I B I L I T Y

Front wipers Rear wiper (Tourer) Lighting

Ring A

Lighting off.

Automatic illumination of headlamps.

Sidelamps.

Control positions

2 Rapid wipe.

1 Normal

Intermittent

0 Off.

Dipped/main beam.

One press downwards:

- Auto: Automatic wipe activated.

) Pull the control stalk to change between dipped and main beam.

Ring B

If the ignition has been switched off for around 1 minute, automatic wiping must be reactivated.

) Rotate ring to the desired position.

Off

Intermittent wipe

Screen wash

Front foglamps on.

Front foglamps and rear foglamps on.

Screenwash

) Pull the wiper control stalk towards you.

94-95

Dual-zone digital air conditioning

V E N T I L A T I O N

Front demisting - defrosting.

Adjustment of temperature on driver's side.

Adjustment of air fl ow.

Adjustment of temperature on passenger's side.

Adjustment of air distribution on passenger's side.

Activation/deactivation of air conditioning.

Driver's side automatic operation.

Adjustment of air distribution on driver's side.

Passenger's side automatic operation.

Rear screen and door mirrors demisting - defrosting.

Air recirculation - fresh air intake.

It is recommended that automatic mode be used by pressing the " " button.

Instrument panel

M O N I T O R I N G

Fuel gauge and low fuel warning lamp.

Cruise control/speed limiter information.

Coolant temperature.

Speedometer.

Instrument panel screen.

Mileage

Trip mileage recorder reset button.

Rev counter.

Engine oil temperature.

Display of automatic gearbox information.

Hazard warning lamps

The hazard warning lamps can also be used with the ignition switched off.

116

- When the ignition is switched on, the orange and red warning lamps come on.

- W hen the engine is running, these warning lamps should go off.

- If any warning lamps remain on, refer to the

"Instruments and controls" section.

Tyre under-inflation detection

M O N I T O R I N G

Economy mode

The tyre under-in fl ation detection system is a driving aid which informs you of the state of your tyres.

It does not replace either vigilance or responsibility on the part of the driver.

After switching off the engine, some systems (radio, wipers, electric windows, sunroof, electric seats, telephone, video, interior lighting, motorised tailgate, etc.) are supplied electrically for a maximum of no more than around one hour, so as to avoid discharging the battery.

117

Once this period is over, a message is displayed in the instrument panel screen and the active functions are placed on standby.

These functions will be automatically reactivated when the vehicle is restarted.

This period may be reduced considerably if the battery's state of charge is low.

200

Seat belts and front passenger's airbag

P A S S E N G E R S A F E T Y

Front passenger's airbag deactivation

Child lock

The seat belt fastened/unfastened status for each seating position is indicated by the lighting or fl ashing of the warning lamps linked to each position:

Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened/unfastened warning lamp.

Front left-hand seat belt warning lamp.

Front right-hand seat belt warning lamp.

Rear right-hand seat belt warning lamp.

Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.

Rear left-hand seat belt warning lamp.

Front passenger's airbag deactivation warning lamp.

Front passenger's airbag activation warning lamp.

To use a rearwards-facing child seat in the front passenger's seat position, the passenger's airbag must fi rst be deactivated.

To do this:

) With the ignition switched off, insert the key into the switch I .

) Turn the key to the "OFF" position; the passenger's airbag is deactivated.

The front passenger's airbag deactivation warning lamp comes on when the ignition is switched on.

125

This deactivates the controls in the rear of the vehicle, both for the rear windows and for opening the rear doors from the inside. The electric child child lock is activated by pressing button J .

The activation of the function is indicated by a message in the instrument panel screen and the lamp in button J .

115

35, 37-38

D R I V I N G

Hill start assist Electric parking brake

Automatic operation

The electric parking brake releases automatically and progressively when you press the accelerator. With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake is applied automatically when the engine is switched off .

Before leaving the vehicle, check that warning lamp A (!) (red) in the instrument panel is on fi xed (not fl ashing) and that warning lamp P (red) in control lever B is on.

Manual operation

The MANUAL application/release of the parking brake is always possible by pulling/pushing control lever , pressing the brake pedal at the same time.

Before leaving the vehicle, check that warning lamp (red) in the instrument panel is on fi xed (not fl ashing) and that warning lamp P (red) in control lever B is on.

To facilitate moving off on a gradient, your vehicle is equipped with a system which keeps it immobilised for a short time (about 2 seconds), the time it takes to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

This function is only active when:

- The vehicle is completely stationary, with your foot on the brake pedal.

- In certain conditions on a gradient.

- With the driver's door closed.

Never leave a child alone inside the vehicle with the ignition on, as they could release the parking brake.

If you leave the vehicle while the engine is still running, apply the parking brake manually.

Do not leave the vehicle while it is being held in the temporary immobilisation hill start assist phase.

129 130 136

Speed limiter

D R I V I N G

Cruise control Instrument panel screen

This system allows you to choose a maximum speed that you do not wish to exceed.

Selection of "LIMIT" : Activation of speed limiter mode.

"SET +" speed.

"SET -": speed.

: Increase the maximum

Reduce the maximum

Suspension or resumption of mode.

This system allows you to maintain a constant vehicle speed programmed by the driver.

Selection of " ":

Activation of cruise control mode.

The speed limiter or cruise control mode is displayed in the instrument panel screen when selected.

"SET" : Memorisation of the speed (system paused).

Speed limiter

"SET +" : Increase the memorised speed (system ON).

Cruise control

"SET -" : Reduce the memorised speed (system ON).

Deactivation.

The chosen speed is memorised.

Suspension or resumption of mode.

The chosen speed must be than 20 mph (30 km/h) .

152

Deactivation.

154

Cruise control is active on the higher gears of the gearbox. The chosen speed must be higher than 25 mph

(40 km/h) .

Direction indicators -

"Motorway" function

D R I V I N G

Ignition switch

) Move the stalk brie fl y upwards or downwards, without going beyond the point of resistance; the direction indicators will fl ash 3 times.

116

● S: Steering lock

To release the steering, turn the wheel slightly while turning the key, but without forcing.

● M: Drive (Ignition on )

● D: Starter

Release the key as soon as the engine starts. Do not operate the starter when the engine is running.

6-speed electronic gearbox system

D R I V I N G S A F E L Y

Automatic gearbox

The automatic gearbox offers:

- Operation in auto-active mode , with adaptation to your style of driving as well as to the road pro fi le ( Position D ) .

- Operation in sequential mode , with manual gear changing ( Position M ) .

- Operation in automatic SPORT mode (Position D) and press button A .

- Operation in automatic SNOW mode (Position D) and press button B .

R Reverse

N Neutral

A Automated mode

M Manual mode

Using paddles 1 "+" and 2 "-" :

- changing gear in manual mode,

- temporary manual control in automated mode.

Positions

P: Park.

R: Reverse gear.

N: Neutral.

D: Automatic mode.

M: Sequential mode.

SPORT programme

) With the gear lever at A and the engine running, press button 3 .

139-142

For safety:

The gear lever can only be disengaged from position if you are pressing the brake pedal.

When a door is opened, an audible signal sounds if the gear lever is not in position P .

In all circumstances, ensure that position P is selected before leaving the vehicle.

146

D R I V I N G S A F E L Y

Stop & Start

Engine going into STOP mode

Deactivation/Reactivation

Engine going into START mode

The "ECO" warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine is put into standby:

The "ECO" warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts:

- with the 6-speed electronic gearbox system : at speeds below 4 mph

(6 km/h), press the brake pedal or put the gear lever in position N .

In certain circumstances, STOP mode may not be available; the then goes off.

"ECO" warning lamp fl ashes for a few seconds

- with the gear lever in position or

M , release the brake pedal,

- or with the gear lever in position and the brake pedal released, select position A M ,

- or select reverse.

143

You can deactivate the system at any time by pressing the comes on.

"ECO OFF" switch; the warning lamp in the button

In certain circumstances, START mode may be invoked automatically; the warning lamp fl ashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

The system is reactivated automatically every time the engine is started using the key.

144

Before refuelling or doing anything under the bonnet, you must switch off the ignition using the key.

144

Parking space sensor

D R I V I N G S A F E L Y

Parking sensors (visual and audible)

Lane departure warning system

You can select the "Parking space sensor" by pressing button A , direction indicator activated on the side of the space to be measured, with a speed lower than 6 mph (10 km/h) and at a distance of less than 1.5 m from the space.

Fixed illumination of the warning lamp indicates that this function is selected.

You can activate/deactivate the parking sensors by pressing button B . When the parking sensors are deactivated, the warning lamp in button B comes on.

159

Use of this system is recommended on motorways and dual carriageways, and operates only at speeds above 50 mph

(80 km/h).

Pressing button activates the function, the warning lamp in the button comes on.

157

The system does not alert you if one of your direction indicators is operating and for approximately 20 seconds after the direction indicator has stopped.

156

E C O - D R I V I N G

Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO

emissions.

Optimise the use of your gearbox

Control the use of your electrical equipment

With a manual gearbox, move off gently, change up without waiting and drive by changing up quite soon.

If your vehicle has the system, the gear ef fi ciency indicator invites you to change up; it is displayed in the instrument panel, follow its instructions.

With an automatic or electronic gearbox, stay in Drive or Auto "A" , according to the type of gearbox, without pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.

"D"

Drive smoothly

Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO

emissions and also helps reduce the background traf fi c noise.

Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning.

Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents open.

Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the temperature in the passenger compartment down (sun roof and window blinds...).

Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic digital regulation, as soon as the desired temperature is attained.

Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic.

Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.

Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light does not require their use.

Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.

As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices ( fi lm, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel.

Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.

If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds above

25 mph (40 km/h) when the traf fi c is fl owing well.

Limit the causes of excess consumption

Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats.

Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference.

Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.

Observe the recommendations on maintenance

Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in the door aperture, driver's side.

Carry out this check in particular:

- before a long journey,

- at each change of season,

- after a long period out of use.

Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.

When refuelling, do not continue after the 3 rd cut-off of the nozzle to avoid any over fl ow.

At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the fi rst 1 800 miles

(3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to a consistent average.

At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and re fi t your summer tyres.

Have your vehicle serviced regularly

(engine oil, oil fi lter, air fi lter...) and observe the schedule of operations recommended by the manufacturer.

M O N I T O R I N G

INSTRUMENT PANELS - PETROL AND DIESEL - MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

Panel grouping together the dials and vehicle operation indicator and warning lamps.

Fuel gauge

Indicator:

● Coolant temperature

● Cruise control/Speed limiter information

Speedometer

Rev counter

Indicator:

●

Engine oil temperature

Gear lever position and gear engaged (Automatic gearbox)

Controls:

● Lighting dimmer

● Resetting to zero of trip mileage computer and maintenance indicator

Instrument panel screen indicating:

● Depending on the page selected with the left-hand thumb wheel on the steering wheel:

- Digital speed repeater

- Trip computer

- Navigation (guidance) information

- Display of message alerts

- Engine oil level check

- Service indicator

● Permanently:

- Trip mileage recorder

- Total mileage recorder

M O N I T O R I N G

The main menu allows you to programme certain vehicle and instrument panel screen functions:

"Choice of language" menu

This allows you to choose the display and voice recognition language.

Main menu

The instrument screen A is located in the centre of the instrument panel.

- With the vehicle stationary, you can access the main menu of the screen by quickly pressing

B on the steering wheel.

- Whilst driving, the message

"Action impossible whilst driving" is displayed on the instrument panel if you try to open the main menu.

"Choice of units" menu

This allows you to choose metric or imperial units.

"Vehicle parameters" menu

This allows you to access the parameters relating to:

- The vehicle lighting.

- The comfort levels in the vehicle.

M O N I T O R I N G

"Lighting" menu

Once you have selected this menu, you can:

) Activate/deactivate the lighting of the daytime running lamps * .

) Activate/deactivate the guideme-home lighting and adjust its duration.

) Activate/deactivate the dualfunction Xenon directional headlamps.

"Comfort" menu

Once you have selected this menu, you can:

) Activate/deactivate the driver's welcome lighting function.

) Select unlocking of all the doors or just the driver's door.

) Activate/deactivate automatic operation of the electric parking brake.

* Depending on country.

M O N I T O R I N G

TRIP COMPUTER

System which provides current information concerning your journey

(range, consumption, etc.)

Information displays

The trip computer is displayed in the instrument panel screen.

) Turn the left-hand thumb wheel A

on the steering wheel to display the various trip computer tabs in succession:

- the current information tab is displayed in zone of the instrument panel screen, with:

● the range,

● the current fuel consumption,

● the digital speed reading or the Stop & Start time counter.

- the trip tab is displayed in zone C of the instrument panel screen, with:

● the distance travelled,

● the average fuel consumption,

● the average speed,

- the trip tab is displayed in zone C of the instrument panel screen, with:

● the distance travelled,

● the average fuel consumption,

● the average speed,

for the second trip.

Trip zero reset

) When the trip required is displayed, press the left-hand thumb wheel on the steering wheel for more than two seconds.

Trips and are independent but their use is identical.

For example, trip can be used for daily fi gures and trip for monthly fi gures.

M O N I T O R I N G

A few definitions…

Range

(miles or km)

This indicates the distance which can still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank in relation to the average fuel consumption over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled.

Current fuel consumption

(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)

This is the average fuel consumption during the last few seconds.

This function is only displayed from

20 mph (30 km/h).

This value may vary following a change in the style of driving or the relief, resulting in a signi fi cant change in the current fuel consumption.

When the range falls below 20 miles

(30 km), dashes are displayed. After fi lling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed when it exceeds 60 miles

(100 km).

If dashes are displayed continuously while driving in place of the digits, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Average fuel consumption

(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)

This is the average fuel consumption since the last trip computer zero reset.

Average speed

(mph or km/h)

This is the average speed calculated since the last trip computer zero reset (ignition on).

Distance travelled

(miles or km)

This indicates the distance travelled since the last trip computer zero reset.

Stop & Start time counter

(minutes/seconds or hours/ minutes)

If your vehicle is fi tted with Stop & Start, a time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey.

It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.

M O N I T O R I N G

Return to the main instrument panel screen display

Successive rotations of the left-hand thumb wheel on the steering wheel allow you to return to the main instrument panel screen display (vehicle speed), via the navigation information screen, then the screen displaying only the total mileage and the trip mileage (bottom of screen).

Display of navigation information on instrument panel screen

You can display navigation information on the instrument panel screen by rotating the left-hand thumb wheel on the steering wheel.

Log of alerts

This function allows you to display the log of alerts.

) Press on button A .

The following messages appear consecutively on the instrument panel screen:

- Tyre pressure check.

- Service indicator reminder.

- Display of message alerts.

- Oil level check.

M O N I T O R I N G

Warning and indicator lamps

Visual indicators which inform the driver of the occurrence of a malfunction or fault (warning lamp) or of the operation of a system (operation or deactivation indicator lamp).

When the ignition is switched on

Certain warning lamps come on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.

When the engine is started, these warning lamps should go off.

If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the information for the warning lamp concerned.

Associated warnings

The illumination, fi xed or fl ashing, of certain warning lamps may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.

Warning lamp

STOP

Service

Warning lamps

When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, the illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a malfunction or fault which requires action on the part of the driver.

The illumination of a warning lamp is always accompanied by the display of an additional message, to assist you in identifying the fault.

If you encounter any problems, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop. is on fi xed, associated with another warning lamp.

temporarily. fi xed.

Cause

It is associated with a punctured tyre or the engine coolant temperature.

A minor fault has occurred for which there is no speci fi c warning lamp.

A major fault has occurred for which there is no speci fi c warning lamp.

Action/Observations

Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Park, switch off the ignition and call a

CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Identify the fault by reading the message shown in the screen, such as, for example:

- the closing of the doors, boot, rear screen or bonnet,

- the remote control battery,

- the tyre pressures,

- saturation of the particle emission fi lter

(Diesel).

For any other faults, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Identify the fault by reading the message shown in the screen and contact a

CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

M O N I T O R I N G

Warning lamp

Braking is on Cause Action/Observations fi xed, associated with the STOP warning lamp.

The braking system fl uid level is too low.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Top up with brake fl uid recommended by

CITROËN.

If the problem persists, have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop. fi xed, associated with the STOP and ABS warning lamp.

The electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) system has a fault.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Have it checked by a CITROËN or a quali fi ed workshop.

Anti-lock

Braking

System

(ABS) fi xed.

The anti-lock braking system has a fault.

The vehicle retains conventional braking.

Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop without delay.

Electric parking brake fl ashing.

Electric parking brake fault fi xed.

The electric parking brake is not applied automatically.

The application/release is faulty.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Park on fl at level ground, switch off the ignition and contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Alone, the electric parking brake has a fault.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop without delay.

The parking brake can be released manually.

For more information on the electric parking brake, refer to the "Driving" section.

M O N I T O R I N G

Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

Deactivation of the automatic functions of the electric parking brake

Dynamic stability control

(ESP/ASR) fl fi xed.

ashing.

The "automatic application"

(on switching off the engine) and "automatic release" functions are deactivated or faulty.

The ESP/ASR regulation is active.

Activate the function (according to country) via the vehicle con fi guration menu or contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop if automatic application/release is not possible.

The parking brake can be released manually using the emergency release procedure.

For more information on the electric parking brake, refer to the "Driving" section.

The system optimises traction and improves the directional stability of the vehicle. fi xed, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the instrument panel screen.

Unless it has been deactivated with the indicator lamp in the button on, the

ESP/ASR system has a fault.

Have it checked by a CITROËN or a quali fi ed workshop.

Engine autodiagnosis system

Brake pad wear fl fi xed.

ashing.

The emission control system has a fault.

The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.

If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or quali fi ed workshop without delay.

The engine management system has a fault.

Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop. fi xed, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.

The brake pads are at an advanced state of wear.

Have the brake pads replaced by a

CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

M O N I T O R I N G

Warning lamp level

Battery charge

Low fuel

Maximum coolant temperature

Seat belt not fastened/ unfastened

Seat belts not fastened/ unfastened fi is on fi xed.

xed red. fi fi

xed.

xed. fi xed, associated with the seat belt not fastened/ unfastened warning lampl.

Cause

When it fi rst comes on there remains approximately

5 litres of fuel in the tank.

The temperature of the cooling system is too high.

Action/Observations

You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel.

This warning lamp wil come on every time the ignition is switched on, until a suf fi cient addition of fuel is made.

Fuel tank capacity: 71 litres.

Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, this could damage the emission control and injection systems.

Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping up the level, if necessary.

If the problem persists, contact a

CITROËN dealer or quali fi ed workshop.

The battery charging circuit has a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or cut alternator belt, ...).

The driver and/or the front/ rear passenger has not fastened or has unfastened their seat belt.

The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.

If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.

The illuminated dots represent the not fastened/unfastened passengers.

They come on:

- fi xed for 30 about seconds on starting the vehicle,

- fi xed from 0 to 12 mph (0 to 20 km/h) when driving,

- fl ashing above 12 mph (20 km/h), accompanied by an audible signal for about 120 seconds.

M O N I T O R I N G

Operation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this con fi rms that the corresponding system has come into operation.

It may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.

Warning lamp

Left-hand direction indicato r

Right-hand direction indicator

Hazard warning lamps

Sidelamps

Dipped beam headlamps

Main beam headlamps is on fl ashing with buzzer.

Cause

The lighting stalk is pushed down.

Action/Observations fl ashing with buzzer.

The lighting stalk is pushed up. fl ashing with audible signal. fi fi fi

xed.

The hazard warning lamps switch, located on the dashboard, has been operated.

The left-hand and right-hand direction indicators and their associated indicator lamps fl ash simultaneously.

The lighting stalk is in the

"Sidelamps" position.

The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped beam headlamps" position.

The lighting stalk is pulled towards you.

Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.

Front foglamps fi xed.

Rear foglamps fi xed. The rear foglamps are switched on.

Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards to switch off the rear foglamps.

M O N I T O R I N G

Warning lamp

Diesel engine pre-heating

Parking brake is on fi xed. fi xed. fl ashing.

Cause

The ignition switch is at the

2nd position (ignition on).

Action/Observations

Wait until the warning lamp has switched off before starting.

The duration for which the warning lamp is on is determined by the climatic conditions.

The parking brake is applied or not properly released.

The parking brake is not fully applied or is released.

Release the parking brake to switch off the warning lamp, keeping your foot on the brake pedal.

Observe the safety recommendations.

For further information on the parking brake, refer to the "Driving" section.

Passenger's airbag system fi xed.

The control switch, located in the glove box, is in the " ON " position.

The passenger's front airbag is activated.

In this case, do not install a rearfacing child seat.

Turn the control switch to the " OFF " position to deactivate the front passenger's airbag.

In this case you can install a rearfacing child seat.

Stop & Start fi xed.

When the vehicle stops (red lights, traf fi c jams, ...) the Stop & Start system has put the engine into

STOP mode. fl ashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

STOP mode is temporarily unavailable.

START mode is invoked automatically.

The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts automatically in

START mode, as soon as you want to move off.

Refer to "Driving - § Stop & Start" for special cases with STOP mode and START mode.

M O N I T O R I N G

Deactivation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this con fi rms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.

This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.

Warning lamp is on

Passenger's airbag system

ESP/ASR fi xed. fi xed.

Cause Action/Observations

The control, located in the glove box, is set to the OFF position.

The passenger's front airbag is deactivated.

In this case you can install a

"rear facing" child seat.

Set the control to the ON position to activate the passenger's front airbag.

In this case, do not fi t a child seat in the rear-facing position.

The button, located in the middle of the dashboard, is pressed. Its indicator lamp is on.

The ESP/ASR is deactivated.

ESP: electronic stability programme.

ASR: anti-skid regulation.

Press the button to activate the ESP/ASR.

Its indicator lamp switches off.

The ESP/ASR system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started.

If deactivated, the system is reactivated automatically from approximately 30 mph

(50 km/h).

M O N I T O R I N G

Service indicator

This information is displayed for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. It informs the driver when the next service is due, in accordance with the manufacturer's servicing schedule.

The point at which the service is due is calculated from the last indicator zero reset. It is determined by two parameters:

- the distance travelled,

- the time elapsed since the last service.

More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due

When the ignition is switched on, no service information appears on the instrument panel central screen.

Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due

For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner symbolising the service operations comes on.

The instrument panel central screen indicates the distance remaining before the next service is due.

Example: 1 900 miles (2 800 km) remain before the next service is due.

For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the central screen indicates:

Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due

Example: 500 miles (900 km) remain before the next service is due.

For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the central screen indicates:

The spanner remains on in the screen to indicate that a service must be carried out soon.

Service overdue

For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, fl

to indicate that the service must be carried out as soon as possible.

Example: the service is overdue by

180 miles (300 km).

For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the central screen indicates:

The spanner remains on in the screen to indicate that a service should have been carried out.

The distance remaining may be weighted by the time factor, depending on the driver's driving habits.

Therefore, the spanner may also come on if you have exceeded the two year service interval.

M O N I T O R I N G

Service indicator zero reset

Engine oil level indicator

System which informs the driver whether the engine oil level is correct or not.

This information is indicated for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, after the service information.

The level read will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 15 minutes.

Oil level gauge fault

This is indicated by displaying of the message "Oil level measurement invalid". Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

After each service, the service indicator must be reset to zero.

The procedure for resetting to zero is as follows:

) switch off the ignition,

) press and hold the trip distance recorder zero reset button,

) switch on the ignition; the distance recorder display begins a countdown,

) when the display indicates "=0" , release the button; the spanner disappears.

Following this operation, if you wish to disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle and wait at least fi ve minutes for the zero reset to be taken into account.

Oil level correct

Oil level incorrect

This is indicated by displaying of the message "Oil level incorrect".

If the low oil level is con fi rmed by a check using the dipstick, it is essential that the level is topped up to prevent damage to the engine.

Engine oil temperature gauge

M O N I T O R I N G

Coolant temperature gauge Fuel gauge

Under normal operating conditions, the bars should be within section 1 .

In severe operating conditions, the bars may extend into section 2 .

In this event, slow down, and if necessary, stop the engine and check the levels (see corresponding section).

Under normal operating conditions, the bars should be within section 1 .

In severe operating conditions, the bars may extend into section , the engine coolant temperature warning lamp and the warning lamp come on, stop as soon as it is safe to do so . Switch off the ignition. cooling fan may continue to operate for a certain time .

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

If the SERVICE warning lamp comes on, check the levels (see corresponding chapter).

On horizontal ground, illumination of the fuel low warning lamp indicates that you are at the reserve level.

An alert message is displayed in the instrument panel.

M O N I T O R I N G

Total distance recorder

System which measures the total distance travelled by the vehicle during its life.

The total and trip distances are displayed for thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off, when the driver's door is opened and when the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

In order to observe legislation, change the units of distance (miles or km) to those for the country you are passing through, using the confi guration menu.

Trip distance recorder

System which measures a distance travelled during a day or other period since it was reset to zero by the driver.

Lighting dimmer

System for manual adjustment of the brightness of the instruments and controls in relation to the exterior brightness.

Operation

) Press button to decrease the brightness of the instruments and controls.

) Press button to increase the brightness of the instruments and controls.

Deactivation

When the lighting is off, or in day mode on vehicles fi tted with daytime running lamps, pressing the buttons does not have any effect.

) With the ignition on, press the button until zeros appear.

M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

MONOCHROME SCREEN C

Presentation

Controls Main Menu

Press on the button to view the

Main Menu of the multifunction screen. This menu gives you access to the following functions:

Time

Ambient temperature

Date and display zone

When the outside temperature is between +3 °C and -3 °C, the temperature display fl ashes (ice risk).

The ambient temperature displayed may be greater than the actual temperature, if the vehicle is parked in bright sunlight.

Access to the "Main Menu"

Cancellation of the operation or return to the previous display

Scrolling in the screen menus

Con fi rmation at the steering wheel

Con fi rmation on the audio equipment control panel

Personalisation -

Configuration

This permits activation/deactivation of the:

- brightness and contrast of the multifunction screen,

- date and time,

- units of the outside temperature displayed.

Radio-CD

(see "Audio and Telematics" chapter)

system

(see "Audio and Telematics" chapter)

It is recommended that the driver should not operate the controls while the vehicle is in motion.

M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

Adjusting the brightness and contrast

) Press on A .

) Use to select the "Brightness - video adjustment" menu. Con fi rm with a press on C on the steering wheel or on the audio equipment.

) Select the con fi guration of the screen using . Con fi rm with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.

) Select the brightness setting.

Con fi rm with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.

) Select the inverse or normal display mode using then validate with a press on C on the steering wheel or on the audio equipment. To adjust the brightness select "+" or "-" and save your setting with a press on C .

) Con fi rm with "OK" on the screen.

Adjusting the date and the time

) Press on A .

) Use to select the "Date and time adjustment" menu, then con fi rm your choice with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.

) Select the screen con fi guration using . Con fi rm with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.

) Select the date and the time settings, using . Con fi rm with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.

) Press to select the values you wish to modify. Con fi rm your choice with a press on equipment.

C on the steering wheel or D on the audio

) Con fi rm with "OK" on the screen.

Choosing the units

) Press on A .

) Use to select the "Choice of units" menu, then con fi rm your choice with a press on equipment.

C on the steering wheel or D on the audio

) Using , select the unit then validate with a press on on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.

) Con fi rm with "OK" on the screen.

Selection of the type of information displayed (Mode)

Successive presses on the end of the wiper stalk or on the button on the audio equipment permit selection of the type of information presented on the multifunction screen (date or radio, CD, MP3 CD,

CD changer).

M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

16/9 COLOUR SCREEN

(WITH MY WAY )

Controls "SETUP" menu

Displays on the screen

It displays the following information automatically and directly:

- time,

- date,

- altitude,

- ambient temperature (the value displayed fl ashes if there is a risk of ice),

- satellite navigation system information.

* According to country.

From the MyWay control panel, to select one of the applications:

) press the dedicated ,

"MUSIC"

"SETUP"

"PHONE"

button for access to the corresponding menu,

) turn the dial to move the selection,

) press the dial to con fi rm the selection, or

) press the "ESC" button to abandon the current operation and return to the previous display.

For more information on these applications, refer to the "Audio

Equipment" section or to the speci fi c user guide given to you with the other owner's documents.

) Press the button to gain access to the menu. This allows you to select from the following functions:

- "System language",

- "Date & time",

- "Display",

- "Units",

- "System".

System language

This menu allows you to select the language used by the display: Deutsch, English, Espanol,

Français, Italiano, Nederlands,

Polski, Portugues, Türkçe * .

M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

Date & time

This menu allows you to set the date and time, the format of the date and the format of the time.

To set the date and time:

) Press the "SETUP" control.

) Turn the dial to select

TIME" .

) Press the dial to con fi rm.

) Turn the dial to select

DATE & TIME" .

) Press the dial to con fi rm.

) Turn the dial to select a fi eld:

- C for the day,

- D for the month,

- E for the year,

- F for the time.

) Press the dial to con fi rm.

) Turn the dial or use the alphanumeric keypad to select the digits which form the date and time.

) Press the dial to con fi rm each fi eld.

) Turn the dial to select

FORMAT" .

) Choose the format required and press the dial to con fi rm.

) Turn the dial to select

FORMAT" .

) Choose the format required and press the dial to con fi rm.

Units

This menu allows you to select the units for temperature (°C or °F) and distance (miles or kilometres).

System

This menu allows you to restore the factory con ing text. fi software version and activate scroll-

For safety reasons, con fi guration of the multifunction screen by the driver must be only done when stationary.

Display

This menu allows you to set the brightness of the screen, the screen colour scheme and the colour of the map (day/night or auto mode).

M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

16/9 HIGH DEFINITION

COLOUR SCREEN (WITH

NAVIDRIVE 3D)

Controls

For more information on these applications, refer to the "Audio

Equipment" section or to the speci fi c user guide given to you with the other owner's documents.

Displays on the screen

It displays the following information automatically and directly:

- time,

- date,

- altitude,

- ambient temperature (the value displayed fl ashes if there is a risk of ice),

- telephone and address book information,

- satellite navigation system information.

From the NaviDrive 3D control panel, to select one of the applications:

) press the dedicated ,

"MEDIA" , ,

"SETUP" button for access to the corresponding menu,

"TRAFFIC" ,

"ADDR BOOK" or

) turn the dial to move the selection,

) press the dial to con fi rm the selection, or

) press the "ESC" button to abandon the current operation and return to the previous display.

"SETUP" menu

M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

Date & Time

This menu allows you to set the date and time, the format of the date and the format of the time (refer to the

"Audio Equipment" section or to the speci fi c user guide given to you with the other owner's documents).

For safety reasons, con fi guration of the multifunction screen by the driver must only be done when stationary.

) Press the "SETUP" button to gain access to the

This allows you to select from the following functions:

menu.

- "Languages and Speech",

- "Date & Time",

- "Display",

- "Units",

- "System".

Display

This menu allows you to set the brightness of the screen, the screen colour scheme and the colour of the map (day/night or auto mode).

Units

This menu allows you to select the units: temperature (°C or °F) and distance (km or miles).

Language & Speech

This menu allows you to:

- select the language used by the display (Deutsch, English,

Espanol, Français, Italiano,

Nederlands, Polski, Portugues,

Türkçe * ),

- select the voice recognition parameters (activation/deactivation, advice on use, personal voice programming, etc.),

- set the volume of the voice synthesiser.

System

This menu allows you to restore the factory con ing text. fi software version and activate scroll-

* According to country.

C O M F O R T

VENTILATION

Sunshine sensor.

Soft air diffusion grille.

The soft air diffusion grille located in the centre of the dashboard provides optimum distribution of the air for the front seats.

This system eliminates unpleasant air currents while maintaining an optimum temperature in the passenger compartment.

To open the soft air diffusion grille, turn the wheel upwards.

To close the soft air diffusion grille, turn the wheel fully downwards.

In very hot weather, to obtain more satisfactory central and side ventilation, it is advisable to close the diffused air grille.

Cooled glove box.

III

Rear passenger vents.

C O M F O R T

HEATING, VENTILATION

AND AIR CONDITIONING

RECOMMENDATIONS

III

Air conditioning

We recommend use of the automatic regulation of the air conditioning.

It permits automatic and optimised control of all of the following functions: air fl ow, temperature in the passenger compartment and air distribution, by means of various sensors

(ambient temperature, sunshine).

This eliminates any need for you to change your settings other than the temperature value displayed.

) Take care not to cover the sunshine sensor A .

If you select the automatic mode

(by pressing the "AUTO" control) and leave all of the vents open, optimum comfort will be maintained and humidity and condensation will be removed regardless of the exterior climatic conditions.

The temperature in the passenger compartment can only be lower than the ambient temperature if the air conditioning is on.

In order to be effective, the air conditioning must be used with the windows closed. If the vehicle has been parked in the sun for a long period and the interior temperature is very high, fi rst ventilate the passenger compartment with the windows open for a few minutes, then close the windows.

To keep the air conditioning system in good working order it is essential that it is operated at least once a month.

The air conditioning uses engine power during its operation. As a result, the fuel consumption of the vehicle increases.

In certain cases of particularly arduous use (e.g. towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures), switching off the air conditioning saves engine power and improves the towing capacity.

Air inlet

Check that the exterior grille for the air inlet, at the bottom of the windscreen, is clean and free of dead leaves, snow, etc.

When washing the vehicle using a high pressure nozzle, avoid spraying at the air inlet.

Air circulation

Maximum comfort is obtained by means of a good distribution of air in the passenger compartment, both in the front and in the rear.

To obtain a uniform distribution of air, take care not to block the exterior air intake grille located at the base of the windscreen, the vents, the air outlets under the front seats and the air extractor located behind the fl aps in the boot.

The front and rear vents are fi tted with thumbwheels to adjust the air fl ow and direction. We recommend that you leave all of the vents open.

Dust filter/Odour filter

(active carbon)

There is a fi lter for excluding odours and dust.

This fi lter must be changed in line with the vehicle's servicing schedule

(see: "Maintenance and Warranty

Guide").

C O M F O R T

DIGITAL AIR CONDITIONING (MONO-ZONE)

The air conditioning system operates with the engine running.

Mono-zone: this is the overall regulation of the temperature, distribution and fl ow of air in the passenger compartment.

The symbols and messages associated with the digital air conditioning controls appear in the multifunction screen.

Automatic operation

Temperature adjustment

Air distribution adjustment

Activation/deactivation of the air conditioning

Air ow adjustment

Front demisting - defrosting

Rear demisting - defrosting

Air recirculation - intake of exterior air

Screen

1. Automatic operation

This is the normal system operating mode.

In accordance with the level of comfort chosen, pressing this control, con fi rmed illumination of indicator lamp A , permits automatic and simultaneous control of all of the following functions:

- Temperature in the passenger compartment.

It is advisable to leave all of the vents open.

Simply pressing one of the controls, with the exception of control 2 , switches the system to manual mode.

Indicator lamp A goes off.

2. Temperature adjustment

Turn control 2 to change the temperature:

- Clockwise to increase the temperature.

- Anticlockwise to reduce the temperature.

The setting required is displayed.

The value indicated in the screen corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in degrees

Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on the screen con fi guration.

A setting around the usually provides optimum comfort.

However, depending on your requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is normal.

On entering the vehicle, the interior temperature may be much colder (or warmer) than is comfortable. There is no need to change the temperature displayed to obtain rapidly the level of comfort required.

The automatic regulation of the air conditioning will use its maximum performance settings to correct the temperature difference as quickly as possible.

III

C O M F O R T

III

Control via the manual controls

It is possible to adjust one or more functions manually, while leaving the other functions in automatic mode.

) Press one of the controls, with the exception of that which regulates the temperature 2 . Indicator lamp A goes off.

Switching to manual mode may result in discomfort (temperature, humidity, odour, condensation) and may not provide optimum comfort.

To return to automatic mode, press the "AUTO" control.

4. Air conditioning

The air conditioning will only operate when the engine is running. The air blower control (air fl ow adjustment) must be active to obtain air conditioning.

) Press control

Indicator lamp comes on.

3. Air distribution adjustment

) Press the controls to change the distribution of the air fl ow.

In order to be effective, the air conditioning must be used with the windows closed.

Deactivating the air conditioning may result in discomfort (temperature, humidity, odour, condensation).

5. Air fl ow adjustment

) Turn control to the right to increase the air fl ow or to the left to reduce it.

The indicator lamps corresponding to the distribution chosen come on:

- Windscreen and front side windows.

- Front ventilation (central and side vents and air diffusion grille if open) and rear ventilation.

- Front and rear footwells.

Simultaneous display of the distribution of air to the windscreen and side windows and of front and rear ventilation is not possible.

The air fl ow level is indicated by the progressive illumination of the bars in the control panel screen 9 .

To prevent condensation and deterioration of the quality of the air in the passenger compartment, ensure that an adequate fl ow of air is maintained.

Switching off the ventilation

) Turn control to the left until the fl ow of air stops.

The symbol is displayed in the multifunction screen.

This action switches off the screen and the indicator lamps.

It deactivates all of the system's functions, with the exception of the rear screen demisting.

The temperature-related comfort is no longer controlled (temperature, humidity, odour, condensation).

Avoid driving for too long with the air conditioning off.

To reactivate the air conditioning:

) Press control 1 .

6. Front demisting - defrosting

In certain cases, the

"AUTO" mode may not be suf fi cient to demist or defrost the windows (humidity, several passengers, ice).

) Press control to clear the windows quickly. The indicator lamp comes on.

C O M F O R T

It controls the temperature, air fl ow and intake and distributes the ventilation to the windscreen and front side windows.

Resuming manual control exits from

"Demisting" mode. It must be cancelled to permit renewal of the air in the passenger compartment and demisting.

Once the screen is clear, pressing control returns the system to

"AUTO" mode.

7. Rear demisting - defrosting

The heated rear screen operates independently of the air conditioning system.

) Press control , with the engine running, to demist the rear screen and the door mirrors. The indicator lamp comes on.

Demisting is switched off automatically to prevent an excessive consumption of current and in relation to the ambient temperature.

It may be stopped by pressing control again or when the engine is switched off.

However, demisting resumes when the engine is switched on again.

Switch off the rear screen and door mirrors demisting when you consider this necessary as low current consumption reduces fuel consumption.

8. Intake of exterior air/

Recirculation of interior air

This function enables you to isolate the passenger compartment from exterior fumes and odours.

) Press control several times to set the air intake mode, the indicator lamp comes on.

It must be cancelled as soon as possible to permit renewal of the air in the passenger compartment and demisting.

- When starting with the engine cold, the fl ow will reach its optimum level gradually to prevent an excessive distribution of cold air.

- When entering the vehicle after it has been parked for a fairly long period, if the interior temperature is very different from your comfort setting there is no need to change the temperature displayed in order to quickly reach the level of comfort required. The system automatically uses its maximum performance to correct the difference in temperature as quickly as possible.

- The water resulting from the air conditioning condensation is discharged via an opening provided for this purpose; therefore, a puddle of water may form underneath the vehicle when stationary.

- In all seasons, if the weather is cool, the air conditioning is useful as it removes the humidity from the air and the condensation. Avoid driving for prolonged periods with the air conditioning switched off.

III

With Stop & Start, when demisting has been activated, the STOP mode is not available.

III

C O M F O R T

DIGITAL AIR CONDITIONING (DUAL-ZONE)

1a-1b. Automatic operation

This is the normal system operating mode.

In accordance with the level of comfort chosen, pressing this control, con fi rmed by illumination of indicator lamp A , permits automatic and simultaneous control of all of the following functions:

- Temperature in the passenger compartment.

The air conditioning system operates with the engine running.

Dual-zone: this is the independent regulation of the temperature and air distribution on the driver's side and the front passenger's side.

The driver and front passenger can each adjust the temperature and the distribution of the air to suit their requirements.

The symbols and messages associated with the digital air conditioning controls appear in the multifunction screen.

1a.

Automatic operation on the driver's side

1b.

Automatic operation on the passenger's side

2a.

Temperature adjustment on the driver's side

2b.

Temperature adjustment on the passenger's side

3a.

Air distribution adjustment on the driver's side

3b.

Air distribution adjustment on the passenger's side

4a.

Driver's zone screen

4b.

Passenger's zone screen

Air ow adjustment

Activation/deactivation of the air conditioning

Air recirculation – intake of exterior air

Rear demisting – defrosting

Front demisting – defrosting

- Automatic air recirculation.

It is advisable to leave all of the vents open. Simply pressing one of the controls, with the exception of temperature regulation and

2b , switches the system to manual mode. Indicator lamp A goes off.

C O M F O R T

2a-2b. Temperature adjustment

) Turn control to change the temperature on the driver's side and control side: to the right to increase the temperature or to the left to reduce it.

2b to change the temperature on the passenger's

The setting required is displayed.

The value indicated on the display corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in degrees

Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on the screen con fi guration.

A setting around the usually provides optimum comfort.

However, depending on your requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is normal.

On entering the vehicle, the interior temperature may be much colder (or warmer) than is comfortable. There is no need to change the temperature displayed in order to quickly obtain the level of comfort required.

The automatic regulation of the air conditioning will use its maximum performance settings to correct the temperature difference as quickly as possible.

Control via the manual controls

) Press one of the controls, with the exception of temperature regulation and

A controls go off.

2b . The indi-

"AUTO"

It is possible to adjust one or more functions manually while leaving the other functions in automatic mode.

Switching to manual mode may result in discomfort (temperature, humidity, odour, condensation) and may not provide optimum comfort.

To return to mode, press controls 1b lamps A come on.

. The indicator

3a-3b. Air distribution adjustment

) Press control

3a to change the distribution of the air fl ow on the driver's side.

III

) Press control to change the distribution of the air fl ow on the passenger's side.

The indicator lamps corresponding to the distribution chosen come on:

- Windscreen and front side windows.

- Front ventilation (central and side vents and air diffusion grille if open) and rear ventilation.

- Front and rear footwells.

Simultaneous display of the distribution of air to the windscreen and side windows and of front and rear ventilation is not possible.

C O M F O R T

III

5. Air fl ow adjustment

) Press the control:

- to increase the air fl ow,

- to reduce the air fl ow.

The air fl ow level is indicated by the progressive lighting of the fan blade indicator lamps.

Reducing the fl switches the air conditioning OFF.

To prevent condensation and deterioration of the quality of the air in the passenger compartment, ensure that an adequate fl ow of air is maintained.

6. Air conditioning

The air conditioning will only operate when the engine is running. The air blower control (air fl ow adjustment) must be active in order to obtain air conditioning.

) Press control . The indicator lamp comes on.

In order to be effective, the air conditioning must be used with the windows closed.

7. Air recirculation intake of exterior air

Automatic air intake mode

It is activated by default in automatic comfort regulation.

Automatic mode is activated with reverse gear or operation of the screenwash.

This function permits recirculation of the air and isolation the passenger compartment from exterior fumes and odours. It is inactive when the ambient temperature is below +5 °C to avoid the risk of misting inside the vehicle.

Closing the air intake

) Press control close the exterior air intake.

While retaining the other settings, this position allows the driver to isolate the passenger compartment at any time from unpleasant exterior odours and fumes.

It must be cancelled as soon as possible to permit renewal of the air in the passenger compartment and demisting.

Intake of exterior air

) Press control once to open the exterior air intake.

C O M F O R T

8. Rear demisting - defrosting

The heated rear screen operates independently of the air conditioning system.

) Press control , with the engine running, to demist the rear screen and the mirrors. The indicator lamp comes on.

Demisting is switched off automatically to avoid excessive consumption of current and depending on the exterior temperature.

It may be stopped by pressing control again or when the engine is switched off.

In this latter case, the demisting resumes if the engine is switched on again within one minute.

9. Front demisting - defrosting

In certain cases, the

"AUTO" mode may not be suf fi cient to demist or defrost the windows

(humidity, several passengers, ice).

) Press control to clear the windows quickly. The indicator lamp comes on.

This system controls the temperature, air fl ow and intake and distributes the ventilation to the windscreen and front side windows.

Resuming manual control exits from the "Demisting" mode. It must be cancelled as soon as possible to permit renewal of the air in the passenger compartment and demisting.

Pressing one of the controls and

1b returns the system to the "AUTO" mode.

Switch off the rear screen and exterior mirrors demisting when you consider this necessary as low current consumption reduces fuel consumption.

With Stop & Start, when demisting has been activated, the STOP mode is not available.

When starting with the engine cold, air fl ow will reach its optimum level gradually to prevent an excessive distribution of cold air.

When entering the vehicle after it has been parked for a fairly long period, if the interior temperature is very different from your comfort setting there is no need to change the temperature displayed in order to quickly reach the level of comfort required. The system automatically uses its maximum performance to correct the difference in temperature as quickly as possible.

The water resulting from the air conditioning condensation is discharged via an opening provided for this purpose; therefore, a puddle of water may form underneath the vehicle when stationary.

In all seasons, if the weather is cool, the air conditioning is useful as it removes the humidity from the air and the condensation. Avoid driving for prolonged periods with the air conditioning switched off.

III

PROGRAMMABLE HEATING

The programmable heating operates independently of the engine.

When the engine is off, it pre-heats the coolant circuit in order to bene fi t from an optimum engine operating temperature from the time the engine is switched on.

The programmable heating system is switched on using the long range remote control. Activation can be immediate or deferred by means of a programming function.

C O M F O R T

Programming remote control

The heating system programming remote control consists of the following buttons and displays:

Scrolling functions menu buttons.

Function indicator lights: clock, temperature, operating time, programmed time, heater operation, heating management symbols.

Digital displays: time, temperature, duration of operation, programmed time or level of heating.

Off button.

On button.

Displays on the remote control screen

Displaying the functions

Press the buttons 1 in succession to display the functions.

The fi rst press of the left-hand or right-hand button displays the time.

Next, the left-hand button permits access to the programming time then to the level of heating (C1 to C5).

The right-hand button permits access to the passenger compartment temperature then to the duration of operation of the heater if it is to be switched on immediately.

If a malfunction of the programmable heating system occurs, contact a CITROËN dealer.

The passenger compartment temperature information is only available when the engine is off.

Setting the time

C O M F O R T

Immediate activation Setting the duration of operation

III

Once the time has been displayed, by means of the buttons buttons in 10 seconds.

1 , press

4 and 5 simultaneously with-

This symbol fl ashes.

Set the time using the buttons

Press buttons 5 simultaneously to save it.

This symbol is displayed ( fi

xed).

Press button (ON) until the message "OK" appears.

When the signal has been received, the message is displayed along with the duration of operation.

The heater starts and this symbol is displayed.

To deactivate the function, press button (OFF) until the message

"OK" appears.

This symbol is switched off.

Set the duration by pressing the buttons (adjustment in steps of

10 mins and max value 30 mins).

Press buttons 4 and 5 simultaneously to save the duration of operation.

This symbol is displayed ( fi xed).

When carrying out these operations, if the message appears, the signal has not been received. Repeat the procedure after changing your location.

Press the buttons to display the duration of operation.

This symbol is displayed.

Once the duration of operation has been displayed, press buttons and

5 simultaneously within 10 seconds.

This symbol fl ashes.

The factory setting value is 30 minutes.

C O M F O R T

III

Programming the heating

You must programme your departure time in order for the system to calculate the optimum heater start time automatically.

Programming the departure time

Press the buttons to display the programming time.

This symbol is displayed.

Once the programming time has been displayed, press buttons 4 and

5 simultaneously within 10 seconds.

This symbol fl ashes.

Set the time by pressing the buttons and press buttons ously to save it.

5 simultane-

This symbol is displayed ( fi xed).

Activation - deactivation

Once the programming time has been displayed by means of the buttons , press button 5 (ON) until the message "OK" appears.

When the signal has been received, the message "OK" with the symbol

is displayed along

"HTM" the heater starts.

This symbol is displayed when

HTM: Heat Thermo Management.

To deactivate the programming, press button (OFF) until the message "OK" appears.

The symbol "HTM" is switched off.

Switching off the heating

Press button (ON).

The symbol "HTM" remains on.

Changing the level of heating

The system offers of heating (from the lowest level to the highest level C5 ).

Once the level of heating has been displayed by means of the buttons press buttons 4 and

1 ,

5 simultaneously.

The letter fl ashes.

Set the level of heating by pressing the buttons 1 .

Press buttons and simultaneously to save the level selected. The letter "C" is displayed ( fi xed).

When carrying out these operations, if the message after changing your location.

appears, the signal has not been received. Repeat the procedure

The factory pre-sets are replaced by the new settings entered. The programmed times are stored until the next time they are changed.

When the departure time is activated, the level of heating cannot be changed. The departure time must be deactivated fi rst.

C O M F O R T

Changing the battery

The remote control is supplied by a

6 V-28L battery, which is supplied.

Information on the display indicates when it is time to replace this battery.

Unclip the casing then replace the battery.

The remote control must then be reinitialised, see below.

Do not discard the used batteries, take them to an approved collection point.

Reinitialising the remote control

If the vehicle's battery is disconnected or the remote control's battery is replaced, the remote control must be reinitialised.

After switching on the power, press button (OFF) for 1 second within the next 5 seconds. If the operation has taken place correctly the message "OK" is displayed on the remote control screen.

If a problem occurs, the message

"FAIL" appears. Repeat the operation.

In addition, your programmable heating can be used to pre-heat your vehicle's passenger compartment.

The interior volumetric protection alarm movement sensor may be disturbed by the fl ow of air from the programmable heating when it is in operation.

To avoid any unexpected triggering of the alarm during use of the programmable heating, it is advisable to deactivate the interior volumetric protection.

Always switch off the programmable heating while fi lling with fuel to avoid any risk of fi re or explosion.

To avoid any risk of poisoning and asphyxiation, the programmable heating must not be used, even for short periods, in an enclosed space such as a garage or workshop which is not equipped with an exhaust gas extraction system.

Do not park the vehicle on an in fl ammable surface (dry grass, dead leaves, paper…), there is a risk of fi re.

The programmable heating system is supplied by the vehicle's fuel tank.

Before use, ensure that the quantity of fuel remaining is suf fi cient. If the fuel tank is at the reserve, we strongly advise that you do not programme the heating.

III

C O M F O R T

FRONT SEATS

Seat consisting of a seat cushion, seat back and head restraint which can all be adjusted for optimum driving comfort.

For your safety, do not drive with the head restraints removed; they must be in place and correctly adjusted.

MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS

Adjustments to the height and angle of the head restraint

To raise it, pull upwards.

To lower it, press on the control A to unlock it, and simultaneously on the head restraint itself. The adjustment is correct when the top edge of the head restraint is at the same height as the top of the head. It is also tilt adjustable.

To raise it, press control to unlock it, then pull it upwards. It may be necessary to adjust the backrest angle.

Adjustment of the backrest angle

Operate the control and adjust the position of the backrest to the front or to the rear.

Adjustment of the seat height

Raise or lower the control the number of times required to obtain the desired position.

Longitudinal adjustment of seat

Lift the control bar and adjust to the desired position.

Adjustment of lumbar support

Turn the control and adjust to the desired position.

Heated seat controls

The heated seats only operate when the engine is running.

C O M F O R T

FRONT SEATS

Adjustment of lumbar support

This function allows you to independently adjust the height and level of lumbar support.

Move the control:

) Forwards or backwards to increase or reduce the lumbar support.

) Upwards or downwards to raise or lower the lumbar support zone.

III

Head restraint height and angle adjustments on electric seats

ELECTRIC ADJUSTMENTS

To adjust the electric seats, switch on the ignition or start the engine if the vehicle has gone into economy mode.

Seat adjustments are also possible for a short period after opening one of the front doors or switching off the ignition.

Adjustment of the seat height and angle, and longitudinal adjustment

) Raise or lower the front of the control to adjust the seat cushion angle.

) Raise or lower the rear of the control to raise or lower the seat.

) Simultaneously raise or lower the front and rear of the control in order to raise or lower the entire seat.

Adjustment of the backrest angle

Move the control forwards or backwards to adjust the backrest angle.

Adjustment of the angle of the top of the backrest

Move the control forwards or backwards to adjust the angle of the top of the backrest.

) To adjust the angle of the head restraint, push back or pull forward section of the head restraint until you reach the desired position.

) To raise it, pull upwards.

) To lower it, press on the control D to unlock it, and simultaneously on the head restraint itself.

) To remove it, press on the control D to unlock it, then pull it upwards.

C O M F O R T

Heated seats control

III

With the engine running, the front seats can operate separately.

) Use the corresponding adjustment dial, placed on the outer side of each front seat, to switch on and select the level of heating required:

0 : Off.

1 : Low.

2 : Medium.

3 : High.

Massage function

This function provides the driver with a back massage. It only operates when the engine is running.

) Press on button A .

The warning lamp comes on and the massage function is activated for a period of 1 hour. During this time, massage is performed in cycles of

6 minutes (4 minutes of massage followed by 2 minutes break). In total, the system will perform 10 cycles.

After 1 hour, the function is deactivated. The warning lamp goes out.

Deactivation

You can deactivate the massage function at any time by pressing on button A .

The Welcome function

The welcome function assists entry and leaving the vehicle.

After switching off the ignition and opening the driver’s door, the seat moves back automatically and then stays in this position, ready for the next entry to the vehicle.

When switching on the ignition, the seat moves forward to the memorised driving position.

When moving the seat, take care that no person or object hinders the automatic movement of the seat.

This function is deactivated by default. You may activate or deactivate this function using the "Main Menu" on the instrument panel screen. To do so, select "Vehicle parameters/

Comfort/Driver welcome".

Storing driving positions

C O M F O R T

Storing a position

Using buttons M/1/2

) Switch on the ignition.

) Adjust your seat.

) Press button , then press button 1 or 2 within four seconds.

An audible signal con fi rms that the settings have been stored.

Storing a new position cancels the previous position.

REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS

III

System which stores the settings of the driver's seat and air conditioning.

Up to two positions can be stored using the buttons on the side of the driver's seat.

For your safety, avoid storing a driving position while driving.

Recalling a stored position

Ignition on or engine running

) Brie fl y press button 1 or to recall the corresponding position.

An audible signal indicates the end of the adjustment.

When the ignition is on, after a few consecutive position recalls, the function will be deactivated until the engine is started, to prevent discharging of the battery.

The rear head restraints can be removed and have two positions:

- high, position for use,

- low, storage position.

To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.

To lower it, press the lug then the head restraint.

To remove it, place it in the high position, push the lug and pull it upwards.

To re fi t it, engage the head restraint rods in the holes taking care to remain in line with the seat back.

Never drive with the head restraints removed, they must be in place and correctly adjusted.

C O M F O R T

III

REAR SEATS Refitting the seat cushion

) Position the seat cushion 1 vertically in its fi xings.

) Fold down the seat cushion 1 .

) Press on the seat cushion to secure it.

Bench seat, the left-hand (2/3) or right-hand (1/3) section of which can be folded to adapt the boot load space.

Removing the seat cushion

) Move the corresponding front seat forwards if necessary.

) Raise the front of the seat cushion 1 .

) Tilt the seat cushion fully against the front seat.

) Remove the seat cushion 1 from its fi xings by pulling upwards.

Folding the seat

In order to fold a rear seat without any risk of damage, always start with the seat cushion, the seat back:

) move the corresponding front seat forwards if necessary,

) raise the front of the seat cushion 1 ,

) tilt the seat cushion 1 fully against the front seat,

) check that the seat belt is positioned correctly on the side of the seat back,

) lower or remove the head restraints if necessary,

) pull the control forwards to release the seat back 2 ,

) tilt the seat back 2 .

The seat cushion 1 can be removed to increase the loading volume.

Returning the seat back to its original position

When returning the rear seat to its original position:

) put the seat back 2 in the upright position and secure it,

) fold the seat cushion 1 ,

) re fi t the head restraints or put them back in place.

When returning the rear seat to its original position, take care not to trap the seat belts and ensure that their buckles are positioned correctly.

The red indicator on the control should no longer be visible; if it is, push the seat fully back.

MIRRORS

Door mirrors

Each fi tted with an adjustable mirror glasses providing the lateral rearward vision necessary for overtaking or parking. They can also be folded.

Adjustment

With the ignition on:

) move control to the right or to the left to select the corresponding mirror,

) move control in all four directions to adjust,

) return control A to the central position.

C O M F O R T

The objects observed are, in reality, closer than they appear.

Take this into account in order to correctly judge the distance of vehicles approaching from behind.

Demisting/defrosting of the door mirrors is associated with that of the rear screen.

Folding

) from outside; lock the vehicle using the remote control or the key.

) from inside; with the ignition on, pull control A rearwards.

If the mirrors are folded using control , they will not unfold when the vehicle is unlocked. Control be pulled again.

A must

Unfolding

) from outside; unlock the vehicle using the remote control or the key.

) from inside; with the ignition on, pull control A rearwards.

If the position is changed manually, a long press on control A re-engages the mirror.

The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors using the remote control can be deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Rear view mirror

Adjustable mirror providing a central rearward view.

Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass: this reduces the nuisance to the driver caused by the headlamps from following vehicles, low sun...

As a safety measure, the mirrors should be adjusted to reduce the

"blind spot".

Manual day/night model

III

Adjustment

) Adjust the mirror so that the glass is directed correctly in the "day" position.

Day/night position

) Pull the lever to change to the

"night" anti-dazzle position.

) Push the lever to change to the normal "day" position.

C O M F O R T

III

Automatic day/night model

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT

The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and reach to adapt the driving position to the size of the driver.

By means of a sensor, which measures the light from the rear of the vehicle, this system automatically and progressively changes between the day and night uses.

It has an anti-dazzle system which darkens the mirror glass: this reduces any driver discomfort caused by the light beam of following vehicles, the sun...

In order to guarantee optimum visibility during your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens automatically when reverse gear is engaged.

In vehicles fi tted with electrochromatic door mirrors, the system has an on/off button and an associated warning lamp.

) With the ignition on, press on button 1 .

The warning lamp comes on and the mirror glass is in automatic mode.

Off

) Press on button 1 .

The warning lamp 2 goes off and the mirror glass remains in its lightest de fi nition.

Adjustment

) First, adjust the driver's seat to the most suitable position.

) When stationary , pull the lever A to unlock the steering wheel adjustment.

) Adjust for height and reach.

) Push the lever to lock the steering wheel adjustment.

After locking, if you press fi rmly on the steering wheel, a slight click may be heard.

As a safety precaution, these operations must only be carried out while the vehicle is stationary.

A C C E S S

REMOTE CONTROL KEY

System which permits central unlocking or locking of the vehicle using the lock or from a distance. It is also used to locate and start the vehicle and provide guide-me-home lighting, as well as providing protection against theft.

Unlocking the vehicle

Complete unlocking using the remote control

) Press the open padlock to unlock the vehicle.

Complete unlocking using the key

) Turn the key to the left in the driver's door lock to unlock the vehicle.

Unlocking is con fi rmed by rapid fl ashing of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds and lighting of the courtesy lamp (if the function is activated).

According to version, the door mirrors unfold at the same time.

Each unlocking is con fi rmed by rapid fl ashing of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds and by switching on of the courtesy lamp.

According to version, the exterior mirrors unfold at the same time as the fi rst unlocking action.

The complete or selective unlocking parameter is set via the instrument panel screen con fi guration menu (see

"Instruments and controls" section).

Complete unlocking is activated by default.

Unfolding the key

) First press button A to unfold the key.

Selective unlocking using the remote control

) Press the open padlock once to unlock the driver's door only.

) Press the open padlock again to unlock the other doors and the boot.

Selective unlocking is not possible using the key.

Electric boot opening

) Press button B to open the boot.

Locking the vehicle

Normal locking using the remote control

) Press the closed padlock to lock the vehicle completely.

) Press the closed padlock for more than two seconds to close the windows and sunroof automatically in addition to locking.

A C C E S S

If one of the doors, the rear screen or the boot is still open, the central locking does not take place.

When the vehicle is locked, if it is unlocked inadvertently, it will lock again automatically after thirty seconds unless a door is opened.

When stationary with the engine off, locking is con fi rmed by fl ashing of the interior locking control indicator lamp.

The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors using the remote control can be deactivated by a

CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Deadlocking using the key

) Turn the key to the right in the driver's door lock to lock the vehicle completely and hold it in this position for more than two seconds to close the windows automatically in addition to locking.

) Turn the key to the right again within fi ve seconds to deadlock the vehicle.

Deadlocking is con fi rmed by fi xed lighting of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds.

According to version, the exterior mirrors fold at the same time.

Normal locking using the key

) Turn the key to the right in the driver's door lock to lock the vehicle completely.

Locking is con fi rmed by fi xed lighting of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds and by the courtesy lamp going off.

According to version, the door mirrors fold at the same time.

Deadlocking using the remote control

) Press the closed padlock to lock the vehicle completely or press the closed padlock for more than two seconds to close the windows and sunroof automatically in addition to locking.

) Press the closed padlock again within fi ve seconds to deadlock the vehicle.

Deadlocking renders the exterior and interior door controls inoperative.

It also deactivates the manual central control button.

When stationary with the engine off, locking is con fi rmed by fl ashing of the indicator lamp on the interior locking control.

If one of the doors or the boot is open or has not been closed correctly, the central locking will not work.

Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.

A C C E S S

Folding the key

) First press button to fold the key.

Locating your vehicle

) Press the closed padlock to locate your locked vehicle in a car park.

This is indicated by switching on of the interior lighting and fl ashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds.

The vehicle remains locked.

Guide-me-home lighting

A press on button operates the guide-me-home lighting (lighting of the sidelamps, dipped beams and number plate lamps).

A second press before the end of the timing cancels the guide-mehome lighting.

The timed duration can be set via the

"Lighting" menu on the "Main Menu" of the instrument panel screen.

Anti-theft protection

Electronic engine immobiliser

The key contains an electronic chip which has a special code. When the ignition is switched on, this code must be recognised in order for starting to be possible.

This electronic engine immobiliser locks the engine management system a few minutes after the ignition is switched off and prevents starting of the engine by anyone who does not have the key.

In the event of a fault, you are informed by illumination of this warning lamp, an audible signal and a message in the screen.

In this case, your vehicle does not start; contact a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.

IGNITION SWITCH

A C C E S S

Steering lock

1. " S": After removing the key, turn the steering wheel to lock the steering. The key can only be removed

S .

2. "M": Ignition switched on, the steering is unlocked (by turning the key to position M , move the steering wheel gently if necessary).

3. "D": Starter position.

Never turn the key to this position when the engine is running.

STOPPING

Vehicles equipped with a turbocharger

Never stop the engine without having allowed it to run for a few seconds at idle, this being the time required for the turbocharger to return to a normal speed.

Do not fl ick the accelerator at the moment of switching off the ignition. This could cause serious damage to the turbocharger(s).

1. "S": Steering lock

To unlock the steering, gently move the steering wheel while turning the key, without forcing it.

2. "M": Drive position

Depending on the version of your vehicle, the orange and red warning lamps should also come on for a short time.

3. "D": Starter

Release the key as soon the engine has started.

If the fi rst attempt fails, switch off the ignition. Wait ten seconds then operate the starter again.

Do not run the engine in an enclosed space or where there is insuf fi cient ventilation.

It is essential always to drive with the engine running in order to retain braking and steering assistance.

Never remove the ignition key before the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

Avoid attaching a heavy object to the key which would weigh down on its shaft in the switch and could cause a malfunction.

A C C E S S

Operating fault

Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, replacement of the remote control battery or in the event of a remote control fault, you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle.

) First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock or lock your vehicle.

) Then, reinitialise the remote control.

If the problem persists, contact a

CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop as soon as possible.

Changing the battery

Reinitialisation

) Switch off the ignition.

) Turn the key to position 2 (Drive) .

) Press the closed padlock immediately for a few seconds, until the operation requested is triggered.

) Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the ignition switch.

The remote control is fully operational again.

Battery ref.: CR0523/3 volts.

This replacement battery is available from CITROËN dealers or a quali fi ed workshop.

If the battery is fl at, you are informed by illumination of this warning lamp, an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.

) Unclip the casing using a coin at the notch.

) Slide the fl at battery out of its location.

) Slide the new battery into its location observing the original direction.

) Clip the casing.

) Reinitialise the remote control.

A C C E S S

Lost keys

Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's V5 registration document and your personal identi fi cation documents.

The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve the key code and the transponder code required to order a replacement key.

Remote control

The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.

Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have to be reinitialised.

The remote control does not operate when the key is in the ignition, even when the ignition is switched off, except for reinitialisation.

Anti-theft protection

Do not make any modi fi cations to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could cause malfunctions.

When purchasing a second-hand vehicle

Have the key codes memorised by a

CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the keys in your possession are the only ones which can start the vehicle.

Locking the vehicle

Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more dif fi cult in an emergency.

As a safety precaution (with children on board), remove the key from the ignition when you leave the vehicle, even for a short time.

Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment.

Take them to an approved collection point.

ALARM *

System which protects and provides a deterrent against theft and breakins. It provides the following types of monitoring:

- Exterior perimeter

The system checks for opening of the vehicle.

The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a door, the boot, the bonnet...

- Interior volumetric

The system checks for any variation in the volume in the passenger compartment.

The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a window, enters the passenger compartment or moves inside the vehicle.

- Tilt

The system checks for any change in the attitude of the vehicle.

The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is lifted, moved or knocked.

Self-protection function

The system checks for the putting out of service of its components.

The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central control or the siren wiring are put out of service or damaged.

For all work on the alarm system, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

A C C E S S

Locking the vehicle with full alarm system

Activation

) Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle.

) Press the locking button on the remote control.

The monitoring system is active: the indicator lamp in the button fl ashes once per second.

After the locking button on the remote control is pressed, the exterior perimeter monitoring is activated after a delay of 5 seconds and the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring after a delay of 45 seconds.

If an opening (door, boot...) is not closed fully, the vehicle is not locked but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be activated after a delay of

45 seconds at the same time as the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring.

* According to country.

Deactivation

) Press the unlocking button on the remote control.

The alarm system is deactivated: the indicator lamp in the button goes off.

Locking the vehicle with exterior perimeter monitoring only

Deactivate the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in certain cases such as:

- leaving a pet in the vehicle,

- leaving a window partially open,

- washing your vehicle,

- changing a wheel,

- having your vehicle towed,

- transport by sea.

Deactivation of the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring

) Switch off the ignition.

) Within ten seconds, press the button until the indicator lamp is on continuously.

) Get out of the vehicle.

) Press the locking button on the remote control immediately.

The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is activated: the indicator lamp in the button fl ashes once per second.

To be effective, this deactivation must be carried out each time the ignition is switched off.

A C C E S S

Reactivation of the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring

) Press the unlocking button on the remote control to deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring.

) Press the locking button on the remote control to activate all the monitoring functions.

The indicator lamp in the button again fl ashes once per second.

Triggering of the alarm

This is indicated by sounding of the siren and fl ashing of the direction indicators for thirty seconds.

The monitoring functions remain active until the alarm has been triggered eleven times in succession.

When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control, rapid fl ashing of the indicator lamp in the button informs you that the alarm was triggered during your absence. When the ignition is switched on, this fl ashing stops immediately.

Failure of the remote control

To deactivate the monitoring functions:

) Unlock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door lock.

) Open the door; the alarm is triggered.

) Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops. The indicator lamp in the button goes off.

Locking the vehicle without activating the alarm

) Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door lock.

Operating fault

When the ignition is switched on, fi xed illumination of the indicator lamp in the button indicates a fault with the system.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Automatic activation *

2 minutes after the last door or the boot is closed, the system is activated automatically.

) To avoid triggering the alarm on entering the vehicle, fi rst press the unlocking button on the remote control.

* According to country.

A C C E S S

ELECTRIC WINDOWS One-touch electric windows

There are two options:

- manual mode

) Press or pull the control gently.

The window stops when the control is released.

Safety anti-pinch

When the window rises and meets an obstacle, it stops and partially lowers again.

Driver's electric window control.

Passenger's electric window control.

Rear right electric window control.

Rear left electric window control.

Deactivation of the rear electric window and door controls.

- automatic mode

) Press or pull the control fi rmly.

The window opens or closes fully when the control is released.

) Pressing the control again stops the movement of the window.

If the window cannot be closed (for example, in the presence of ice), immediately after the movement is reversed:

) press and hold the control until the window opens fully,

) then pull the control immediately and hold it until the window closes,

) continue to hold the control for approximately one second after the window has closed.

The safety anti-pinch function is not operational during these operations.

The electric window controls remain operational for approximately seconds after the ignition is switched off or until the vehicle is locked after a door is opened.

If one of the passenger windows cannot be operated from the driver's door control panel, carry out the operation from the control panel of the passenger door concerned, and vice versa.

A C C E S S

Reinitialisation

If a window does not rise automatically, its operation must be reinitialised:

) pull the control until the window stops,

) release the control and pull it again until the window closes fully,

) continue to hold the control for approximately one second after the window has closed,

) press the control to lower the window automatically to the low position,

) when the window has reached the low position, press the control again for approximately one second.

The safety anti-pinch function is not operational during these operations.

Deactivation of the rear electric window and door controls

) For the safety of your children, press control 5 to deactivate the rear electric window controls regardless of their position.

Indicator lamp on, the rear controls are deactivated.

Indicator lamp off, the rear controls are activated.

A message in the instrument panel screen informs you of the activation/ deactivation of the control.

This control also deactivates the interior controls for the rear doors

(refer to the section "Child safety - §

Electric child lock").

Any other status of the indicator lamp indicates a fault with the electric child lock.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.

If an obstacle is encountered during operation of the electric windows, you must reverse the movement of the window. To do this, press the control concerned.

When the driver operates the controls for the passengers' electric windows, they must ensure that no one is preventing correct closing of the windows.

The driver must ensure that the passengers use the electric windows correctly.

Be aware of children when operating the windows.

A C C E S S

From inside

DOORS

Opening

From outside

Manual centralised control

System which provides full manual locking or unlocking of the doors and boot from the inside.

) After unlocking the vehicle completely using the remote control or the key, pull the door handle.

) Pull the front door control to open the door; this unlocks the vehicle completely.

) Pull the rear door control to open the door; this unlocks only the door opened.

Locking

) Press button A to lock the vehicle.

The red indicator lamp on the button comes on. It fl ashes when the doors are locked while stationary with the engine off.

When the selective unlocking is activated, the fi rst press of the remote control unlocking button permits unlocking of the driver's door only.

With the selective unlocking activated:

- the driver's door control unlocks the driver's door only,

- the other door controls unlock the other doors and the boot.

The interior door controls do not operate when the vehicle is deadlocked.

If one of the doors is open, the central locking from the inside does not take place.

Unlocking

) Press button again to unlock the vehicle.

The red indicator lamp on the button switches off.

If the vehicle is locked or deadlocked from the outside, the red indicator lamp fl ashes and button is inactive.

) In this case, use the remote control or the key to unlock the vehicle.

Automatic central locking

System which provides full automatic locking or unlocking of the doors and the boot while driving.

You can activate or deactivate this function.

A C C E S S

Locking

When the speed exceeds 6 mph

(10 km/h), the doors and the boot lock automatically.

If one of the doors is open, the automatic central locking does not take place.

If the boot is open, the automatic central locking of the doors is active.

Unlocking

) Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press button A to unlock the doors and the boot temporarily.

Activation

) Press button for more than two seconds.

A con fi rmation message appears on the instrument panel screen, accompanied by an audible signal.

Deactivation

) Press button again for more than two seconds.

A con fi rmation message appears on the instrument panel screen, accompanied by an audible signal.

Emergency control

To lock or unlock the doors manually in the event of a malfunction of the central locking system or battery failure.

Locking the driver's door

) Insert the key in the lock, then turn it to the rear.

Unlocking the driver's door

) Insert the key in the lock, then turn it to the front.

Locking the front and rear passenger doors

) On the rear doors, check that the child lock is not activated.

) Remove the black cap, located on the edge of the door, using the key.

) Insert the key in the socket without forcing it, then without turning it, move the latch sideways towards the inside of the door.

) Remove the key and re fi t the cap.

Unlocking the front and rear passenger doors

) Pull the interior door opening control.

A C C E S S

BOOT (SALOON)

Opening

) Press upwards on lever 1 and lift up the boot lid.

With the vehicle stationary, this is carried out using:

- The remote control.

- The key in a door lock.

- The interior central locking/unlocking control.

System for mechanical unlocking of the boot in the event of a battery or central locking malfunction.

The boot automatically locks when the vehicle is moving at a speed of over 6 mph (10 km/h), even if automatic central locking is deactivated.

It is unlocked when a door is opened or when the central locking button is pressed (speed lower than 6 mph

(10 km/h)).

Unlocking

) Fold back the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot.

) Insert a small screwdriver into hole of the lock to unlock the tailgate.

) Push the white part, located inside the lock, to the left to unlock the boot.

A C C E S S

BOOT (TOURER)

Manual opening

) Press upwards on lever A and lift up the tailgate.

Electric opening

) Press upwards on lever , or press button of the remote control.

Do not attempt to help the opening of the tailgate manually after pressing the control A .

Manual closing

) Lower the tailgate using the interior handle C .

Electric closing

) Press the push-button D to close the tailgate.

Do not interrupt the closing of the tailgate; if any obstacle prevents it closing, the operation will stop and the tailgate will automatically rise by a few centimetres.

Locking/unlocking

With the vehicle stationary, this is carried out using:

- The remote control.

- The key in a door lock.

- The interior central locking/unlocking control.

The boot automatically locks when the vehicle is moving at a speed of over 6 mph (10 km/h), even if automatic central locking is deactivated.

It is unlocked when a door is opened or when the central locking button is pressed (at a speed of less than

6 mph (10 km/h)).

Interrupting the opening/ closing of the tailgate

When the tailgate is being opened or closed electrically, you can interrupt its movement at any point by pressing push-button button B .

D , the control or

You can then open or close the tailgate electrically or manually, if necessary moving it in the opposite direction to release it.

Memorisation of an intermediate position

You can store an opening angle for the tailgate:

) Manually or automatically move the tailgate to the required position.

) Make a long press on push-button D . The system emits a short audible beep.

) Release the push-button D .

A C C E S S

Cancelling the memorisation

With the tailgate in the intermediate position, you can cancel the stored position:

) Make a long press on pushbutton D . The system emits a long audible beep.

) Release the push-button D . The tailgate will return to the fully open position at the next use.

To avoid risk of injury, make sure that no one is in the vicinity of the boot while opening and closing.

If the tailgate is carrying extra weight (snow, bicycle carrier, etc.) there is a risk of it closing under this load. Support the tailgate or fi rst unload the bicycle carrier or clear the snow.

When using an automatic car wash, don’t forget to lock the vehicle so as to avoid any risk of motorised opening of the tailgate.

Electrical protection of the motor

If the tailgate is repeatedly opened and closed in quick succession, the motor can start to overheat and then cut out, preventing opening and closing of the tailgate.

Allow the motor to cool down for ten minutes without opening or closing the tailgate.

Closing in manual back-up mode remains possible.

PANORAMIC SUNROOF

(SALOON)

Operation

A C C E S S

Sunroof open

- Press to fi rst notch: closure.

- Press to second notch: automatic total closure.

Tilted sunroof

- Press to fi rst notch: closure.

- Press to second notch: automatic total closure.

Reinitialisation

After a battery disconnection or if there has been a malfunction, you have to re-initialise the anti-pinch function.

) move control B until the roof is in the complete tilting position,

) keep control B pressed down for a minimum of 1 second.

During these operations, the antipinch function does not operate .

Sunroof closed

- Press to fi rst notch: tilting.

- Press to second notch: automatic complete tilting.

- Press to fi rst notch: sliding towards rear.

- Press to second notch: automatic total sliding towards rear.

Your sun roof is fi tted with a manuallyoperated blind.

Anti-pinch

An anti-pinch device stops the sun roof from closing, whether sliding or tilting. If it meets an obstacle, it reopens.

Always remove the ignition key when leaving the vehicle, even if for a short time.

In the event of anything being caught by the sunroof closing, you must reverse the roof movement.

Do this by reversing the position of the control switch.

When the driver is operating the sunroof, they must always make sure that the passengers are not preventing it from closing properly.

The driver must ensure that passengers use the sunroof control correctly.

Pay special attention to where children are when operating the sunroof.

The fi tting of a sunroof as an accessory is prohibited.

PANORAMIC SUNROOF

(TOURER)

This comprises a tinted glass panoramic area 1 to improve brightness and vision in the passenger compartment.

It is fi tted with an electric blind to help maintain a comfortable temperature and reduce noise.

SEQUENTIAL ELECTRIC

BLIND

A C C E S S

Opening

) Press control A .

Pressing to the 1st notch allows you to open the blind step by step.

Pressing to the allows you to fully open the blind.

The blind stops in the closest prede fi ned position (11 positions) as soon as you release the control.

Closing

) Press control B .

Press to the fi to close the blind step by step.

Press to the to close the blind completely.

The blind stops at the nearest preset position (11 positions) as soon as you release the control.

Anti-pinch

If the blind meets an obstacle whilst closing, it stops and opens partially again.

You must re-initialise the anti-pinch function within 5 seconds of the blind stopping:

) press control until the blind is fully closed (closing in steps of a few centimetres).

After a battery disconnection, or if there has been a malfunction, you have to re-initialise the anti-pinch function:

) press control to the 2nd notch

(fully closed),

) wait until the blind is fully closed,

) press control B for at least 3 seconds.

If the blind opens randomly during a closing operation, and straight after the blind stops:

) Press control until the blind closes fully.

During these operations, the antipinch function does not operate.

In the event of anything being caught when the blind is moving, you must reverse the movement of the blind. To do so, reverse the position of the control.

When the driver is operating the blind, he or she must always make sure that the passengers are not preventing it from closing properly.

The driver must ensure that passengers use the blind correctly.

Pay particular attention to children when operating the blind .

A C C E S S

FUEL TANK

Capacity of the tank: approximately

71 litres * .

Low fuel level

When the minimum level in the tank is reached, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible warning and a message on the multifunction screen. When it fi rst comes on, there remains around 5 litres of fuel in the tank.

You must refuel to avoid running out of fuel.

Opening the fuel flap

Refuelling

) turn the key a quarter turn to lock and unlock the fi ller cap,

) when refuelling, place the cap on hook A ,

) fi ll the tank, but after the third cut-off ; this could cause your vehicle to malfunction.

While you are refuelling, the engine must be stopped and the ignition switched off.

For a petrol engine with a catalytic converter, unleaded fuel is compulsory.

Additions of fuel must be of at least

5 litres to be taken into account by the fuel gauge.

The fi ller neck is narrower to ensure that only unleaded petrol nozzles can be put in.

Opening the fi ller cap may create a noise of an inrush of air. This vacuum, which is entirely normal, is caused by the sealing of the fuel system.

With Stop & Start, never refuel with the system in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.

) Press at the top left corner, then pull open from the left.

* 55 litres for Slovakia.

A C C E S S

MISFUEL PREVENTION

(DIESEL) *

Mechanical device which prevents fi lling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of engine damage that can result from fi lling with the wrong fuel.

Located in the fi ller neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the fi ller cap is removed.

Quality of the fuel used for petrol engines

The petrol engines are perfectly compatible with E10 type petrol biofuels (containing 10 % ethanol), conforming to European standards

EN 228 and EN 15376.

E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol) are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must comply with European standard EN 15293.

For Brazil only, special vehicles are marketed to run on fuels containing up to 100 % ethanol (E100 type).

Quality of the fuel used for

Diesel engines

The Diesel engines are perfectly compatible with biofuels which conform to current and future European standards (Diesel fuel which complies with standard EN 590 mixed with a biofuel which complies with standard EN 14214) available at the pumps (containing up to 7 % Fatty

Acid Methyl Ester).

The B30 biofuel can be used in certain Diesel engines; however, this use is subject to strict application of the special servicing conditions.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

The use of any other type of (bio)fuel

(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage to the engine and fuel system).

Operation

When a petrol fi ller nozzle is introduced into the fuel fi ller neck of your

Diesel vehicle, it comes into contact with the fl ap. The system remains closed and prevents fi lling.

Do not persist but introduce a

Diesel type ller nozzle.

It remains possible to use a fuel can to fi ll the tank; this must be done slowly.

In order to ensure a good fl ow of fuel, do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in direct contact with the fl ap of the misfuel prevention device. * According to country of sale.

V I S I B I L I T Y

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

CONTROLS

Control stalk for the selection and control of the various front and rear lamps providing the vehicle's lighting.

Main lighting

The various front and rear lamps of the vehicle are designed to adapt the driver's visibility progressively in relation to the climatic conditions:

- sidelamps, to be seen,

- dipped beam headlamps to see without dazzling other drivers,

- main beam headlamps to see clearly when the road is clear.

Additional lighting

Other lamps are fi tted to ful fi l the requirements of particular driving conditions:

- a rear foglamp to be seen from a distance,

- front foglamps for even better forward vision,

- directional headlamps for improved visibility when cornering,

- daytime running lamps to be seen during the day.

Programming

Various automatic lighting control modes are also available depending on options:

- automatic illumination of headlamps,

Main lighting mode selection ring: turn it to position the symbol required facing the mark.

Lamps off.

In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal; it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.

Automatic illumination of headlamps.

Sidelamps only.

Manual controls

Dipped headlamps or main beam headlamps.

Stalk for switching headlamps: pull the stalk towards you to switch the lighting between dipped and main beam headlamps.

In the lamps off and sidelamps modes, the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily

("headlamp fl ash") by maintaining a pull on the stalk.

The lighting is controlled directly by

A and the stalk .

Displays

Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp in the instrument panel confi rms that the lighting selected is on.

V I S I B I L I T Y

Foglamps selection ring.

The foglamps operate with the sidelamps and the dipped and main beam headlamps.

Model with rear foglamps only

Model with front and rear foglamps

In good or rainy weather, both day and night, use of the front foglamps and the rear foglamps is prohibited.

In these situations, the power of their beams may dazzle other drivers.

They should only be used in fog or falling snow.

In these weather conditions, it is your responsibility to switch on the foglamps and dipped headlamps manually as the sunshine sensor may detect suf fi cient light.

Do not forget to switch off the front and rear foglamps when they are no longer needed.

- 1 st turn forwards: rear foglamps on.

- 1 st turn rearwards: rear foglamps off.

- 1st turn forwards: front foglamps on.

- 2nd turn forwards: rear foglamps on.

- 1st turn rearwards: rear foglamps off.

- 2nd turn rearwards: front foglamps off.

Lighting left on

When a front door is opened with the ignition off and in manual lighting mode, an audible signal warns the driver if the vehicle's lighting is still on.

In this case, switching off the lighting stops the audible signal.

With the ignition off, if the dipped headlamps remain on, they will switch off automatically after thirty minutes to prevent discharging of the battery.

V I S I B I L I T Y

Daytime-running lamps

System which switches on special lamps at the front, to make the vehicle more visible by day.

They light up automatically and permanently, when the engine is running, if:

- The function is activated * in the

"Main Menu" of the instrument panel screen.

- The lighting control is at position 0 or AUTO .

- All the headlamps are off.

* this function using the "Main Menu" of the instrument panel screen.

Manual guide-me-home lighting

Temporarily keeping the dipped beam headlamps on after the vehicle's ignition has been switched off makes the driver's exit easier when the light is poor.

Automatic illumination of headlamps

The sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are switched on automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, when a low level of external light is detected or in certain cases of activation of the windscreen wipers.

As soon as the brightness returns to a suf fi cient level or after the windscreen wipers are switched off, the lamps are switched off automatically.

Switching on

) With the ignition off, " fl ash" the headlamps using the lighting stalk.

) A further "headlamp fl ash" switches the function off.

Switching off

The manual guide-me-home lighting switches off automatically after a set time.

Activation

) Turn ring to the position.

The automatic illumination of headlamps is accompanied by a message in the instrument panel screen.

Deactivation

) Turn ring to a position other than . Deactivation is accompanied by a message in the instrument panel screen.

* According to country.

V I S I B I L I T Y

Linked with the automatic

"Guide-me-home" lighting

The link with the automatic illumination of headlamps provides the

"guide-me-home" lighting with the following additional options:

- selection of the duration of lighting for 15, 30 or 60 seconds in the vehicle parameters on the instrument panel screen con fi guration menu,

- automatic activation of "guideme-home" lighting when automatic illumination of headlamps is in operation.

Operating fault

In the event of a fault with the sunshine sensor, the lighting comes on and a message appears in the instrument panel screen, accompanied by an audible signal.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may detect suf fi cient light.

Therefore, the lighting will not come on automatically.

Do not cover the sunshine sensor, linked with the rain sensor and located in the centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror; the associated functions would no longer operate.

MANUAL HEADLAMP

ADJUSTMENT

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT

OF DIRECTIONAL

HEADLAMPS

To avoid dazzling other road users, the height of the halogen bulb headlamps must be adjusted according to the load in the vehicle.

1 or 2 people in the front seats.

5 people.

5 people + maximum authorised loads.

Driver + maximum authorised loads.

Initial setting is position "0" .

To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, this system corrects the height of the xenon headlamp beams automatically and when stationary, depending on the load in the vehicle.

If a fault occurs, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the instrument panel screen.

The system then places your headlamps in the lowest position.

Do not touch the xenon bulbs.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

V I S I B I L I T Y

DIRECTIONAL LIGHTING

"Cornering lighting" function

With dipped or main beams, this function provides additional lighting for the inside of a bend, when the vehicle speed is below 25 mph

(approx 40 km/h).

This lighting is most useful when travelling at low and medium speed

(urban driving, winding road, intersections, parking manoeuvres...).

Activation

This function is activated:

- when the direction indicator is activated,

- from a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel. without cornering lighting

Deactivation

This function is deactivated:

- below a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel,

- when stationary or at very low speed,

- when reverse gear is engaged,

- when the directional headlamps are switched off. with cornering lighting

V I S I B I L I T Y

Directional headlamps function

When the dipped or main beam headlamps are on, this function, associated with the "cornering lighting" function, enables the light beam to follow the direction of the road.

The use of this function, linked with the xenon headlamps only, considerably improves the quality of your lighting when cornering.

Programming

The function is activated or deactivated via the instrument panel screen "Main Menu".

To do this, select "Vehicle parameters\

Lighting\Directional headlamps". without directional lighting with directional lighting

Operating fault

If a fault occurs, this warning lamp fl ashes in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message in the multifunction screen.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

When stationary or moving at very low speed or when reverse gear is engaged, the function is inactive.

The status of the function remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

V I S I B I L I T Y

WIPER CONTROLS

System for selection and control of the various front and rear wiping modes for the elimination of rain and cleaning.

The vehicle's front and rear wipers are designed to improve the driver's visibility progressively according to the climatic conditions.

Manual controls

The wiper commands are issued directly by the driver by means of the stalk and the ring B .

Windscreen wipers

Wiping speed selection stalk:

Programming

Various automatic wiper control modes are also available according to the following options:

- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,

- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.

fast (heavy rain),

normal (moderate rain),

intermittent (proportional to the speed of the vehicle),

park,

single wipe (press down and release),

automatic, then single wipe (see following page).

Rear wiper (Tourer)

rear wiper selection ring:

park,

intermittent wipe,

wash-wipe (set duration).

If a signi fi cant accumulation of snow or ice is present, or when using a tailgate bicycle carrier, deactivate the automatic rear wiper via the instrument panel screen con fi guration menu.

V I S I B I L I T Y

Reverse gear

When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper operates if the windscreen wipers are operating.

Programming

The function is activated or deactivated via the instrument panel screen con fi guration menu.

This function is activated by default.

Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers operate automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, if rain is detected

(sensor behind the rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall.

Windscreen and headlamp wash

) Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards you. The windscreen wash then the windscreen wipers operate for a fi xed period.

The headlamp washers only operate when the dipped beam headlamps are on .

Activation

This is controlled manually by the

A to the

"AUTO" position.

It is accompanied by a message in the instrument panel screen.

Switching off

This is controlled manually by the

A upwards and returning it to position .

It is accompanied by a message in the instrument panel screen.

The automatic wiping must be reactivated if the ignition has been off for more than one minute, by pushing

A downwards.

Operating fault

If an automatic wiping malfunction occurs, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with the sunshine sensor and located in the centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror.

Switch off the automatic wiping when using an automatic car wash.

In winter, it is advisable to wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic wiping.

Special position of the windscreen wipers

V I S I B I L I T Y

COURTESY LAMPS

Front courtesy lamp

This position permits release of the windscreen wiper blades.

It is used for cleaning or replacement of the blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to detach the blades from the windscreen.

In the moment following switching the ignition off, any action on the stalk positions the wipers vertically on the windscreen.

To park the wipers after this has been done, switch on the ignition and operate the stalk.

To maintain the effectiveness of the " fl at-blade" wiper blades, it is advisable to:

- handle them with care,

- clean them regularly using soapy water,

- avoid using them to retain cardboard on the windscreen,

- replace them at the fi rst signs of wear.

Front courtesy lamp

Map reading lamp s

Rear courtesy lamp

Rear courtesy lamp

Map reading lamps

In this position, the courtesy lamp comes on gradually:

- when the vehicle is unlocked,

- when a door is opened,

- when the key is removed from the ignition,

- when the remote control locking button is activated, in order to locate your vehicle.

It switches off gradually:

- when the vehicle is locked,

- when the ignition is switched on,

- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.

Lighting off.

Lighting on.

V I S I B I L I T Y

In lighting on mode, different lighting times are available:

- with the ignition off, approximately ten minutes,

- in energy economy mode, approximately thirty seconds,

- with the engine running, unlimited.

Map reading lamps

) With the ignition on, press the corresponding switch.

Panoramic sunroof rear reading lamps (Tourer)

With the key in position or with the ignition on:

) Press the corresponding switch.

The reading lamp concerned comes on for ten minutes.

The rear reading lamps come on:

- when the key is removed from the ignition,

- when the vehicle is unlocked.

They switch off gradually:

- when the vehicle is locked,

- when the ignition is switched on.

INTERIOR MOOD LIGHTING

Your vehicle is equipped with interior mood lighting for the centre console and the door handles.

V I S I B I L I T Y

Central console

The lamps are located on the roof console, near the front interior lamp.

They illuminate the central console.

Operation

These lamps are activated with the automatic illumination of headlamps, when the ambient light is poor. They are deactivated when the instrument panel is off.

The intensity of the lighting varies along with that of the instrument panel.

) Press buttons A to increase or reduce the intensity of the lighting.

Lighting for door opening controls

This is located on the front and rear interior door opening controls.

The rear door opening controls lighting is deactivated if the child lock is on.

V I S I B I L I T Y

WELCOME LIGHTING

The welcome lighting is made up of:

- The interior (roof) lamps.

- The pavement lighting when a door is open.

Floor lighting Pavement lighting

In the front of the vehicle, when a door is opened, this illuminates the interior of the vehicle.

With the door open, this illuminates the ground next to the vehicle.

SUN VISOR

F I T T I N G S

COOLED GLOVE BOX SKI FLAP

) With the ignition on, lift the fl ap; the mirror is illuminated automatically.

To prevent dazzle from ahead, fold the visor downwards.

It can be disengaged from its central fi xing and pivoted over to the side windows if required.

) To open the glove box, pull on the handle and lower the lid.

The glove box has a manually closable

B .

It has 2 or 3 sockets to connect audio/video equipment, and a slot for a SIM card (see "Audio and

Telematics" section).

It has automatic illumination.

A fl ap in the backrest, located to the rear of the armrest, facilitates the carrying of long objects.

To open

) Lower the rear armrest.

) Pull the ap handle down.

) Lower the ap.

) Load the objects from inside the boot.

Whilst driving, the glove box should be kept closed.

Ensure that the objects are well secured and that they do not impede the operation of the gear lever.

100

F I T T I N G S

MATS

Equipment available for the driver and front passenger.

Removing

) Slide the seat back as far as possible,

) unclip the xings,

) remove the xings, then the mat.

To avoid any interference with the pedals:

- only use mats which are suitable for the fi xings already present in the vehicle. The use of these fi xings is essential,

The use of a mat not approved by

CITROËN may obstruct access to the pedals and hinder the cruise control/speed limiter function.

Floor mats approved by CITROËN are fi tted with a 3rd fi xing located in the pedal area to avoid any risk of interference with the pedals.

FRONT ARMREST

Adjustment

To optimise your driving position:

) lift the control A ,

) push the armrest forwards.

The armrest returns to its initial position when you push it rearwards.

Cup-holder/USB port

Refitting

) Position the mat correctly,

) clip the fi xings,

) check that the mat is held is place correctly.

Comfort and storage system for the driver and front passenger.

The front armrest includes a cup holder and a USB port.

The USB port allows connection of a portable device, such as a USB memory stick, sending the audio fi les to your audio system so that they can be heard via the vehicle's speakers.

) Lift the armrest to access the cup holder or the USB port.

101

Driver's oddments tray

) Pull the handle towards you.

REAR ARMREST

F I T T I N G S

Cup-holder

The rear cup-holder is located in the rear central armrest.

) Lower the rear armrest.

) Pull forwards to extract the cupholder.

Storage

) Lift up the upper part of the rear central armrest to access storage space B .

SIDE BLINDS

12 V ACCESSORIES SOCKET

) Pull on the tab A and position the blind on the hook B .

REAR BLIND (SALOON)

102

Comfort and storage system for the rear passengers.

This is located in the rear ashtray.

Max power: 100 W.

) pull on the tab to unreel the blind,

) position the blind on the hooks D .

F I T T I N G S

BOOT FITTINGS (SALOON)

Battery location for vehicles with

V6 HDi engine.

Boot oor (spare wheel storage).

Boot lamp.

Location for 6 CD changer.

Luggage securing rings

) Use the 4 securing rings on the boot fl oor to secure your luggage.

For safety reasons in the event of sharp braking, you are advised to place heavy objects as far forward in the boot as possible.

103

BOOT FITTINGS (TOURER)

F I T T I N G S

Hook

For shopping bags.

Torch

To recharge, return it to its storage position.

Storage net or Battery compartment (for vehicles with 3 litre

V6 HDi engine).

This provides access to the battery.

Luggage-cover blind

(see details on following page)

Luggage securing rings

Use the 4 stowing rings provided on the boot fl oor to secure your loads.

For safety reasons in the event of sharp braking, you are advised to place heavy objects as far forwards as possible.

Hooks

These allow a cargo net to be fi tted (see details on following page).

Boot lamp

12 V accessories socket (100 W maximum)

Cigar lighter type 12 volt socket.

It is located on the rear righthand trim.

Loading height control

You can change the height of the vehicle to make loading or unloading easier.

Hook

For shopping bags.

Storage net or closed housing

Location for the 6 CD changer.

104

LUGGAGE COVER (TOURER)

F I T T I N G S

High load retaining net

(Tourer)

To roll up

) Press the handle (PRESS) gently.

The luggage cover rolls up automatically.

The moving part can be folded along the rear bench seat backrest.

To install

) Position the left-hand end of the luggage cover roller in its location behind the rear bench seat.

) Compress the roller control and put the roller in place in its location C on the right.

) Release the control to secure the luggage cover.

) Unroll it to its fastening on the rear pillar.

Hooked onto the special upper and lower fi xings, this permits use of the entire loading volume up to the roof:

- behind the rear seats (row 2),

- behind the front seats (row 1) when the rear seats are folded.

When positioning the net, check that the strap loops are visible from the boot; this will make slackening or tightening easier.

To remove

) Compress the control and lift the luggage cover on the right then on the left to remove it.

105

F I T T I N G S

Installation

) fold down the backs of the rear seats,

) position the high load retaining net roller above the two rails located behind the rear seats

(2/3 bench seat). The two notches must be placed above the two rails,

) slide the two rails into the notches and push the roller

(lengthways) from right to left to secure it,

) reposition the rear seat backs.

Row 1

To use it in row 1:

) fold down the backs of the rear seats,

) open the covers of the corresponding upper fi xings,

) unroll the high load retaining net and position one of the ends of the net's metal bar in the corresponding fi xing cover. Check that the hook is secured in the rail located inside the cover 3 ,

) pull the high load retaining net's metal bar to position the other hook in the second fi xing cover.

Row 2

To use it in row 2:

) open the covers of the corresponding upper fi xings,

) from the rear bench seat, unroll the high load retaining net, pushing it to detach it from the retaining hooks,

) position one of the ends of the net's metal bar in the corresponding fi xing cover. Check that the hook is secured in the rail located inside the cover,

) position the other hook in the second fi xing cover and pull the metal bar towards you.

106

C H I L D S A F E T Y

GENERAL POINTS RELATING

TO CHILD SEATS

Although one of CITROËN's main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children also depends on you.

For maximum safety, please observe the following recommendations:

- in accordance with European regulations, the age of 12 or less than one and a half metres tall must travel in approved child seats suited to their weight , on seats fi tted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings * ,

- statistically, the safest seats in your vehicle for carrying children are the rear seats,

- a child weighing less than 9 kg must travel in the "rearwardsfacing" position both in the front and in the rear.

CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

"Rearwards-facing"

When a "rearwards-facing" child seat is installed on the senger seat , it is essential that the passenger airbag is deactivated.

Otherwise, being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were to in fl .

"Forwards-facing"

When a "forwards-facing" child seat is installed on the seat , adjust the vehicle's seat to the intermediate longitudinal position with the seat back upright and leave the passenger airbag activated.

VII

Intermediate longitudinal position

CITROËN recommends that rear seats of your vehicle:

- "rearwards-facing" up to the age of 2,

- "forwards-facing" over the age of 2.

* The rules for carrying children are speci fi c to each country. Refer to the current legislation in your country.

107

C H I L D S A F E T Y

Passenger airbag OFF

Refer to the advice given on the label present on both sides of the passenger's sun visor.

VII

108

To assure the safety of your child, you must deactivate the passenger's front airbag when you install a child seat in the rearwards facing position on the front passenger's seat.

Otherwise, there is a risk that the child could be seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed.

C H I L D S A F E T Y

CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN

CITROËN offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt :

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"

Installed in the rearwards-facing position.

Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

"RECARO Start''

"KLIPPAN Optima"

From the age of 6 years

(approximately 22 kg), the booster is used on its own.

VII

"RÖMER KIDFIX"

Can be fi tted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.

The child is restrained by the seat belt.

109

C H I L D S A F E T Y

POSITIONS FOR CHILD SEATS SECURED USING THE SEAT BELT

In conformity with European law, this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of universally approved child seats (a) using a seat belt, depending on the weight of the child and the seating position in the vehicle.

Seat position(s)

Groups 0 (c) and 0+

< 13 kg

Weight of child

Group 1

9 to 18 kg

Group 2

15 to 25 kg

Group 3

22 to 36 kg

VII

Row 1

Front passenger (b) with height adjustment

Front passenger (b) without height adjustment

Outer rear

U (R )

U (R)

Row 2

Centre rear U U U U

(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.

(b) Consult the current legislation for your country before driving with your child in this seat.

U: seat position suitable for installation of universally approved rearwards-facing and/or forwards-facing child seat.

U (R): As U , with the vehicle seat, which must be adjusted to the highest position.

110

"ISOFIX" MOUNTINGS

Your vehicle has been approved in new ISOFIX regulation s .

The outer rear seats are fi tted with regulation ISOFIX mountings.

C H I L D S A F E T Y

In the rear

Saloon

These are three rings for each outer rear seat:

- two lower rings , located between the vehicle seat back and cushion, indicated by a label,

- an upper ring B , fi xed to the rear shelf, concealed under a fl ap with the logo TOP TETHER behind the head restraint.

Tourer

- two lower rings , located between the vehicle seat back and cushion, indicated by a label,

- an upper ring , fi xed to the roof on the boot side, concealed under a fl ap with the logo TOP

TETHER.

This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, reliable and safe fi tting of the child seat in your vehicle.

The are fi tted with two locks which are secured easily on the two rings with the seat).

A , following installation of the guides (supplied

Some also have an which is attached to the ring or .

To attach this strap in the rear, remove the vehicle seat's head restraint and stow it. Lift the cover on the rear shelf

(Saloon) or the roof (Tourer). Then fi x the hook on the ring tighten the upper strap.

C and

The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident.

For information regarding the

ISOFIX child seats which can be installed in your vehicle, consult the table of positions for fi tting

ISOFIX child seats.

VII

111

C H I L D S A F E T Y

VII

ADVICE ON CHILD SEATS

The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident.

When installing a child seat using the seat belt, check that the seat belt is tightened correctly on the child seat and that it secures the child seat fi rmly on the seat of your vehicle.

Remember to fasten the seat belts or the child seat harnesses slack in relation to the child's body to a minimum, even for short journeys.

For optimum installation of the "forwards-facing" child seat, ensure that the back of the child seat is in contact with the back of the vehicle's seat and that the head restraint does not cause any discomfort.

If the head restraint has to be removed, ensure that it is stored or attached securely to prevent it from being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking.

Children under the age of 10 must not travel in the "forwards-facing" position on the front passenger seat, unless the rear seats are already occupied by other children, cannot be used or are absent.

Deactivate the passenger airbag * when a "rearwards-facing" child seat is installed on the front seat. Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were to in fl ate.

Installing a booster seat

The chest part of the seat belt must be positioned on the child's shoulder without touching the neck.

Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt passes correctly over the child's thighs.

CITROËN recommends the use of a booster seat which has a back, fi tted with a seat belt guide at shoulder level.

As a safety precaution, do not leave:

- one or more children alone and unsupervised in a vehicle,

- a child or an animal in a vehicle which is exposed to the sun, with the windows closed,

- the keys within reach of children inside the vehicle.

To prevent accidental opening of the doors, use the "Child lock".

Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third.

To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fi t side blinds on the rear windows.

* According to country and current local legislation.

112

C H I L D S A F E T Y

ISOFIX CHILD SEAT RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN AND APPROVED FOR YOUR VEHICLE

RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX (size category )

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Installed in the forwards-facing position.

Fitted with an upper strap to be secured on the upper ring B or C , referred to as the TOP TETHER.

Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.

VII

This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fi tted with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.

Follow the instructions for fi

113

C H I L D S A F E T Y

VII

POSITIONS FOR FITTING ISOFIX CHILD SEATS

In conformity with European law (ECE 16), this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of ISOFIX child seats to seats in the vehicle fi tted with ISOFIX mounting points.

For ISOFIX universal and semi-universal child seats, the ISOFIX size class, de fi ned by a letter from A to , is shown on the child seat to the right of the ISOFIX logo.

Up to 10 kg

(group 0)

Up to around

6 months

Shell

Weight of child/ Age given as a guide

Up to 10 kg

(group 0)

Up to 13 kg

(group 0+)

Up to around 1 year

9 to 18 kg (group 1)

Approx 1 to 3 years

"Rearwards-facing" "Rearwards-facing" "Forwards-facing"

C D E C D A B B1

Type of ISOFIX child seat

ISOFIX size class

Universal and semi-universal

ISOFIX child seats can be installed on:

- Front passenger seat

- Outer rear seats

- Centre rear seat

IL-SU *

IL-SU IL-SU

Non ISOFIX seat position

IUF/IL-SU

IUF: Seat position suitable for installation of an I so fi x U niversal " orwards-facing" seat attached using the top tether.

IL-SU: Seat position suitable for installation of an I SOFIX S emi- U niversal child seat, either:

114

To attach the upper strap, refer to the "ISOFIX mountings" paragraph.

X: Seat not suitable for installation of an ISOFIX seat of the size class indicated.

* The ISOFIX shell, fi xed to the lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies two rear seats.

C H I L D S A F E T Y

ELECTRIC CHILD LOCK

Remote control system to prevent opening of the rear doors using their interior controls and use of the rear electric windows.

Deactivation

) Press button A again.

The indicator lamp in button goes off, accompanied by a message in the instrument panel screen.

This indicator lamp remains off until the child lock is activated.

Any other status of the indicator lamp indicates a fault with the electric child lock. Have it checked by a

CITROËN or a quali fi ed workshop.

The control is located on the driver's door, with the electric window controls.

Activation

) Press button A .

The indicator lamp in button A comes on, accompanied by a message in the instrument panel screen.

This system is independent and in no circumstances does it take the place of the central locking control.

Check the status of the child lock each time you switch on the ignition.

Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.

In the event of a serious impact, the electric child lock is deactivated automatically to permit the exit of the rear passengers.

VII

115

DIRECTION INDICATORS

Selection of the left or right direction indicators to signal a change of direction of the vehicle.

S A F E T Y

HAZARD WARNING LAMPS

A visual warning by means of the direction indicators to alert other road users to a vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.

HORN

Audible warning to alert other road users to an imminent danger.

VIII

) Left: lower the lighting stalk beyond the point of resistance.

) Right: raise the lighting stalk beyond the point of resistance.

"Motorway" function

) Press brie fl y upwards or downwards, without going beyond the point of resistance; the direction indicators will fl ash 3 times.

) Press this button, the direction indicators fl ash.

They can operate with the ignition off.

Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps

When braking in an emergency, depending on the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps come on automatically.

They switch off automatically the fi rst time you accelerate.

) You can also switch them off by pressing the button.

) Press the left or right-hand part of the fi steering wheel.

Use the horn moderately and only in the following cases:

- overtaking a cyclist or pedestrian

- when approaching an area where there is no visibility.

EMERGENCY OR

ASSISTANCE CALL

This system allows you to make an emergency or assistance call to the emergency services or to the dedicated CITROËN service.

For more information on the use of this function, refer to the "Audio and telematics" section.

116

S A F E T Y

TYRE UNDER-INFLATION

DETECTION

System which automatically checks the pressures of the tyres while driving.

Choice of detection

This function provides warning of tyres that are under-in fl ated or punctured.

Automatic detection

Sensors monitor the tyre pressures.

In the event of an anomaly, a message will appear in the instrument panel screen.

Driver request detection

You can check the tyre pressures at any time.

) Press on button A (CHECK); the information will be displayed in the instrument panel screen.

Tyre pressures OK display

) Press on button A (CHECK).

The system indicates to you that the tyres are correctly in fl ated.

This information is only available on request by the driver.

Under-inflated tyre

automatic detection detection on request

Automatic detection:

A message indicates which tyre is under-in fl ated.

Driver request detection:

The vehicle outline indicates the under-in fl ated tyre(s).

The message is accompanied by illumination of the lamp and an audible beep.

warning

) Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.

VIII

117

S A F E T Y

Wheel not monitored Punctured tyre

) If you have fi tted wheels that are not equipped with tyre de fl ation detection (wheels with snow tyres, etc.), contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop. automatic detection automatic detection

VIII detection on request

Automatic detection:

A message indicates which tyre is punctured.

Driver request detection:

The vehicle outline indicates the punctured tyre(s).

The message is accompanied by illumination of the lamp and an audible beep.

warning detection on request

Automatic detection:

A message indicates to you which wheel is not monitored.

Driver request detection:

The vehicle outline indicates the wheel(s) which is/are not monitored.

) The message is accompanied by illumination of the warning lamp and an audible beep. have it checked by a

CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

118

The de fl ation detection system is a driving aid, but which does not absolve the driver from the need to be vigilant and responsible.

This system does not dispense with the requirement to check the tyres on a regular basis (see

"Identi fi cation markings") to ensure optimum vehicle behaviour and to avoid premature tyre wear under certain conditions (high load, high speed).

Do not forget to check the tyre

Any repair or replacement of a tyre on a wheel that is equipped with a sensor must be carried out by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

The system may suffer from temporary interference caused by electro-magnetic transmissions on frequencies close to that use by the system .

S A F E T Y

BRAKING ASSISTANCE

SYSTEMS

Group of supplementary systems which help you to obtain optimum braking in complete safety in emergency situations:

- anti-lock braking system (ABS),

- electronic brake force distribution

(EBFD),

- emergency braking assistance

(EBA).

Anti-lock braking system and electronic brake force distribution

Linked systems which improve the stability and manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking, in particular on poor or slippery surfaces.

Activation

The anti-lock braking system comes into operation automatically when there is a risk of wheel lock.

Normal operation of the ABS may make itself felt by slight vibration of the brake pedal.

Operating fault

If this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the instrument panel screen, it indicates a fault with the anti-lock braking system which could result in loss of control of the vehicle when braking.

If this warning lamp comes on, together with the and ABS warning lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the instrument panel screen, it indicates a fault with the electronic brake force distribution which could result in loss of control of the vehicle when braking.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

In both cases, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Emergency braking assistance

System which, in an emergency, enables you to obtain the optimum braking pressure more quickly, thus reducing the stopping distance.

Activation

It is triggered by the speed at which the brake pedal is pressed.

The effect of this is a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an increase in braking ef fi ciency.

When braking in an emergency, press fi rmly without releasing the pressure.

VIII

When replacing wheels (tyres and rims), ensure that they conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

When braking in an emergency, press very fi rmly without releasing the pressure.

119

S A F E T Y

TRAJECTORY CONTROL

SYSTEMS

Anti-slip regulation (ASR) and electronic stability programme (ESP)

The anti-slip regulation (also known as Traction Control) optimises traction to prevent skidding of the wheels, by acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and on the engine.

The electronic stability programme acts on the brake of one or more wheels and on the engine to keep the vehicle on the trajectory required by the driver, within the limits of the laws of physics.

VIII

Intelligent traction control system ("Snow motion")

Your vehicle has a system to imintelligent traction control .

This system detects situations of low adhesion that might make moving off and progress dif fi cult on deep fresh snow or compacted snow . intelligent traction control system regulates the amount of wheel slip to optimise the traction and trajectory control of your vehicle.

For vehicles with Hydractive III + suspension, manual adjustment of ground clearance to the intermediate position improves further the ability to make progress in deep snow (see the relevant paragraph).

The use of snow tyres is strongly recommended on surfaces with low adhesion.

Activation

These systems are activated automatically each time the vehicle is started.

They come into operation in the event of a grip or trajectory problem.

This is indicated by fl ashing of this warning lamp in the instrument panel.

Deactivation

In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate the ASR and

ESP systems, so that the wheels can move freely and regain grip.

) Press the button, located in the middle of the dashboard.

If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the indicator lamp in the button comes on, this indicates that the ASR and ESP systems are deactivated.

It is recommended that these systems be reactivated as soon as possible.

120

The ESP/ASR systems offer exceptional safety in normal driving, but this should not encourage the driver to take extra risks or drive at high speed.

The correct operation of these systems depends on observation of the manufacturer's recommendations regarding the wheels (tyres and rims), the braking components, the electronic components and observation of the assembly and repair procedures used by CITROËN dealers.

After an impact, have these systems checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

S A F E T Y

Reactivation

Below 30 mph (50 km/h), press the

"ESP OFF" button to reactivate these systems.

They are reactivated automatically above 30 mph (50 km/h) or every time the ignition is switched off.

Operating fault

If this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the instrument panel screen, this indicates a fault with these systems.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

SEAT BELTS

Front seat belts

The front seat belts are fi tted with a pretensioning system and force limiter.

This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front impact.

Depending on the seriousness of the impact, the pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belt against the body of the occupant.

The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on.

The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt against the chest of the occupant, so increasing his protection.

Fastening

) Pull the belt down in front of you in a steady movement, making sure that it does not become twisted.

) Press the fastening into its buckle.

) Check that it is properly secured and that the automatic locking mechanism operates correctly by pulling sharply on the belt strap.

) The lap strap should be positioned as low down as possible in the lap and as tight as possible.

) The diagonal strap should be positioned across the chest and away from the neck.

Each belt has a reel that adjusts its length automatically to the girth of the seat occupant.

VIII

121

Height adjustment

S A F E T Y

Rear seat belts

VIII

When correctly adjusted, the seat belt shoulder strap falls over the middle of the shoulder.

) To adjust the belt, squeeze the control and slide it in the direction required.

Unfastening

) To unfasten the belt, press on the red button in the buckle.

The belt retracts automatically when not in use.

Each rear seat is fi tted with a threepoint inertia reel seat belt with force limiter.

Fastening

) Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the buckle.

) Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.

Unfastening

) Press the red button on the buckle.

122

S A F E T Y

The driver must ensure that passengers use the seat belts correctly and that they are all restrained securely before setting off.

Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, always fasten your seat belt, even for short journeys.

Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as they will not ful fi l their role fully.

The seat belts are fi tted with an

inertia reel permitting automatic

adjustment of the length of the strap to your size. The seat belt is stowed automatically when not in use.

Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt is reeled in correctly.

The lower part of the strap must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis.

The upper part must be positioned in the hollow of the shoulder.

The inertia reels are fi tted with an automatic locking device which comes into operation in the event of a collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release the device by pulling fi rmly on the strap and releasing it so that it reels in slightly.

In order to be effective, a seat belt must:

- be tightened as close to the body as possible,

- be pulled in front of you with a smooth movement, checking that it does not twist,

- be used to restrain only one person,

- not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,

- not be converted or modi fi ed to avoid affecting its performance.

In accordance with current safety regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle, go to a quali quali fi fi ed workshop with the skills and equipment needed, which a CITROËN dealer is able to provide.

Have your seat belts checked regularly by a CITROËN dealer or a

ed workshop, particularly if the straps show signs of damage.

Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or a textile cleaning product, sold by CITROËN dealers.

After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned and reeled in correctly.

Recommendations for children

Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is less than 12 years old or shorter than one and a half metres.

Never use the same seat belt to secure more than one person.

Never allow a child to travel on your lap.

In the event of an impact

Depending on the nature and seriousness of the impact , the pretensioning device may be deployed before and independently of the airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners is accompanied by a slight discharge of harmless smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system.

In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes on.

Following an impact, have the seat belts system checked, and if necessary replaced, by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

VIII

123

S A F E T Y

VIII

AIRBAGS

System designed to maximise the safety of the occupants (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of violent collisions. It supplements the action of the force-limiting seat belts.

If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors record and analyse the front and side impacts sustained in the impact detection zones:

- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags are deployed instantly and protect the occupants of the vehicle (with the exception of the rear centre passenger); immediately after the impact, the airbags de fl ate rapidly so that they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the occupants,

- in the case of a minor or rear impact or in certain roll-over conditions, the airbags will not be deployed; the seat belt alone is suf fi cient to provide optimum protection in these situations.

Impact detection zones

Front impact zone.

Side impact zone.

The airbags do not operate when the ignition is switched off.

This equipment will only operate once. If a second impact occurs

(during the same or a subsequent accident), the airbag will not operate.

124

Deployment of the airbag(s) is accompanied by a slight emission of harmless smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system.

This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive individuals may experience slight irritation.

The noise of the detonation may result in a slight loss of hearing for a short time.

S A F E T Y

Front airbags

System which protects the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in the event of a front impact.

The driver's airbag is fi tted in the centre of the steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is fi tted in the dashboard above the glove box.

Deactivation Activation

When you remove the child seat, turn switch to the "ON" position to reactivate the airbag and so assure the safety of your front passenger in the event of an impact.

Deployment

The airbags are deployed simultaneously, unless the passenger's front airbag is deactivated, in the event of a serious front impact to all or part of the front impact zone , in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the front to the rear of the vehicle.

The front airbag in fl ates between the front occupant of the vehicle and the dashboard to cushion their forward movement.

Only the front passenger's airbag can be deactivated:

) with the ignition off , insert the key in the passenger airbag deactivation switch 1 ,

) turn it to the "OFF" position,

) then, remove the key keeping the switch in this position.

This warning lamp comes on in the roof console screen when the ignition is on and until the airbag is reactivated.

To assure the safety of your child, the passenger's airbag must be deactivated when you install a

"rearwards-facing" child seat on the front passenger seat.

Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed.

Operating fault

If this symbol appears in the instrument panel screen, accompanied by an audible warning and a message, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

VIII

If this warning lamp fl ashes, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

If both airbag warning lamps come on continuously, do not install a

"rearwards-facing" child seat on the front passenger seat.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

125

S A F E T Y

Lateral airbags *

System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest.

Each lateral airbag is fi tted in the front seat back frame, on the outer side.

Impact detection zones Deployment

It is deployed at the same time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the event of a serious side impact to all or part of the side impact zone B , perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle.

The curtain airbag in fl ates between the front or rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.

Front impact zone.

Side impact zone.

In the event of a minor impact or bump on the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be deployed.

The airbag is not deployed in the event of a rear or front collision.

VIII

Deployment

It is deployed unilaterally in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B , perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle.

The lateral airbag in fl ates between the front occupant of the vehicle and the corresponding door trim panel.

Curtain airbags *

System which protects the driver and passengers (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of head injuries.

Each curtain airbag is fi tted in the pillars and the upper part of the passenger compartment.

Operating fault

If this symbol appears in the instrument panel screen, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualifi ed workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

* According to country.

126

S A F E T Y

For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the following safety rules:

Sit in a normal upright position.

Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.

Do not leave anything between the occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, object...). This could hamper the operation of the airbags or injure the occupants.

After an accident or if the vehicle has been stolen or broken into, have the airbag systems checked.

All work on the airbag system must be carried out by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Even if all of the precautions mentioned are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms when an airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The bag in fl ates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then de fl ates within the same time discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose.

Front airbags

Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part of the wheel.

Passengers must not place their feet on the dashboard.

If possible, do not smoke as deployment of the airbags can cause burns or the risk of injury from a cigarette or pipe.

Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently.

Lateral airbags

Use only approved covers on the seats, compatible with the deployment the lateral airbags. For information on the range of seat covers suitable for your vehicle, you can contact a

CITROËN dealer (see "Practical information - § Accessories").

Do not fi x or attach anything to the seat backs (clothing...). This could cause injury to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is deployed.

Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary.

Curtain airbags

Do not fi x or attach anything to the roof. This could cause injury to the head if the curtain airbag is deployed.

If fi tted on your vehicle, do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof, they play a part in securing the curtain airbags.

VIII

127

MANUAL PARKING BRAKE

D R I V I N G

Release

) Press on the end of the lever whilst pulling it then lower it fully.

Mechanical device for immobilising the vehicle when stationary.

Application

) Pull the parking brake lever up to immobilise your vehicle.

To facilitate the action on the lever, you are recommended to press the brake pedal at the same time.

This warning lamp comes on if the parking brake is engaged or not fully released.

If the parking brake is released, the illumination of this warning lamp along with the warning lamp indicates that the brake fl uid level is low or a fault with the brake force distributor.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

128

In all circumstances, as a precautionary measure, engage fi rst gear.

On steep gradients, turn the steering wheel towards the pavement.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE

The electric parking brake combines

2 operating modes:

- AUTOMATIC

Automatic application when the engine stops and automatic release on use of the accelerator

(automatic operation by default),

- MANUAL

Manual application/release of the parking brake is always possible by pulling control lever while pressing the brake pedal.

D R I V I N G

Automatic operation

Application with the engine off

With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake when the engine is switched off.

The application of the parking brake is con fi rmed by:

- warning lamp in the control lever A coming on,

- this warning lamp in the instrument panel coming on,

- display of a message "handbrake on" in the instrument panel screen.

The noise of operation will con fi rm to you the application/release of your electric parking brake.

Before leaving the vehicle, check that warning lamp and the warning lamp in the instrument panel are on fi xed (not fl ashing).

Never leave a child alone inside the vehicle with the ignition on, as they could release the parking brake.

Application with the engine running

With the engine running and the vehicle stationary, in order to immobilise the vehicle you need to manually apply the parking brake by pulling on control lever A .

The application of the parking brake is con fi rmed by:

- warning lamp in the control lever A coming on,

- this warning lamp in the instrument panel coming on,

- display of a message "handbrake on" in the instrument panel screen.

When the driver’s door is opened, a beep is heard and a message displayed if the parking brake has not been applied.

Before leaving the vehicle, check that warning lamp and the warning lamp in the instrument panel are on fi xed (not fl ashing).

129

D R I V I N G

Release releases automatically and progressively when you press the accelerator:

) with a ( fi rst gear or reverse gear engaged), press down fully on the clutch pedal then press on the accelerator pedal and move off.

) with an automatic gearbox , accelerate with the selector in position D , M or R .

Full release of the parking brake is con fi rmed by:

- warning lamp in the control lever A going off,

- this warning lamp in the instrument panel going off,

- display of a message "handbrake off" in the instrument panel screen.

When stationary, with the engine running, do not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily (particularly when starting the engine, including in neutral), as you may release the parking brake.

Do nat place any object (packet of cigarettes, telephone...) between the gear lever and the electric parking brake control.

130

Activation/Deactivation of the automatic functions

Depending on the country of sale, automatic application when switching off the engine and automatic release when moving off can be deactivated. The activation/deactivation is done in the instrument panel screen con fi guration menu. Select

"Vehicle parameters/Comfort/Auto handbrake".

Deactivation of these functions is signalled by this warning lamp in the instrument panel.

With the automatic functions deactivated, the parking brake must be applied and released manually.

Manual operation

Manual application/release of the parking brake is always possible.

In some special circumstances, with the engine not running,

(towing, icy conditions...) the automatic parking brake can be released manually, with the key in the running position.

If the con fi guration menu does not have the option to activate/deactivate the automatic functions, this can be done by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Application

With the vehicle stationary, to apply the parking brake whether the engine is running or off, on control lever A .

The application of the parking brake is con fi rmed by:

- warning lamp in the control lever A coming on,

- this warning lamp in the instrument panel coming on,

- display of a message "handbrake on" in the instrument panel screen.

When the driver’s door is opened with the engine running, a message is displayed accompanied by an audible signal if the parking brake has not been applied.

D R I V I N G

Release

With the ignition on or the engine running, to release the parking brake, press on the brake pedal, push then release control lever A .

The full application of the parking brake is con fi rmed by:

- warning lamp in the control lever A going off,

- this warning lamp in the instrument panel going off,

- display of a message "parking brake released" in the instrument panel screen.

If you push control lever without pressing the brake pedal, the parking brake will not be released and the message "Apply foot on brake" will be displayed on the instrument panel.

When stationary, with the engine running, do not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily, as you may release the parking brake.

Maximum application

maximum application of the parking brake. It is obtained by means of a long pull on control lever A , until you see the message "Max application of the handbrake" and a beep is heard.

Maximum application is essential:

- in the case of a vehicle towing a caravan or a trailer, if the automatic functions are activated but you are applying the parking brake manually,

- when the gradient you are parked on is variable in its effect (e.g. on a ferry, in a lorry, during towing).

- in the case of towing, a loaded vehicle or parking on a gradient, turn the front wheels towards the pavement and engage a gear when you park.

- after a maximum application, the release time will be longer.

Particular situations

In certain situations (starting the engine...), the parking brake can automatically alter its level of application.

This is normal operation.

To advance your vehicle a few centimetres without starting the engine, but with the ignition on, press on the brake pedal and release the parking brake then releasing control lever A .

The full release of the parking brake is con fi rmed by the warning lamp in the control lever and the warning lamp in the instrument panel going off and the display of a message

"handbrake off" on the instrument panel screen.

If the parking brake malfunctions while applied or if the battery is fl at, an emergency release is still possible.

To ensure correct operation of the parking brake and therefore your safety, the number of successive application/release operations is limited to eight.

If this number is exceeded, you are warned by the message "Parking brake faulty" and a warning lamp fl ashes.

131

Dynamic emergency braking

D R I V I N G

If a failure of the ESP system is signalled by the lighting of this warning lamp, then braking stability is not guaranteed. In this event, stability must be assured by the driver by repeating alternate "pull release" actions on control lever A .

Emergency parking brake release

The dynamic emergency braking should only be used in exceptional circumstances.

In the event of a failure of the vehicle’s main braking system or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver taken ill, under instruction, etc) pull and hold control lever to stop the vehicle.

The electronic stability programme

(ESP) provides stability during dynamic emergency braking.

If there is a fault with the dynamic emergency braking, one of the following messages will be displayed in the instrument panel screen:

- "Parking brake faulty".

- "Parking brake control faulty".

If the vehicle cannot be immobilised, do not operate the emergency release. Your vehicle may run away if on a slope.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

In the event of the electric parking brake failing to release, an emergency device can be used to release the parking brake manually, provided that it is possible to immobilise the vehicle while the procedure is carried out.

) If you can start the vehicle: with the engine running, immobilise the vehicle by applying the foot brake while the operation is being carried out.

) If you are unable to start the vehicle ( fl at battery for example): do not use this device and contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop. However, if you are obliged to proceed, fi rst immobilise your vehicle securely and then follow the instructions below.

132

D R I V I N G

) On sloping ground: immobilise the vehicle by placing the chocks

(if your vehicle has them) in front or behind the two front wheels, against the slope

On level ground: immobilise the vehicle by placing the chocks

(if your vehicle has them) in front and behind one of the front wheels.

) Open the lower compartment of the centre armrest by pulling it.

) Ensure that the cup holder is folded away.

) Remove the rubber mat covering the base of the armrest.

) Release the strap from its location C .

) Pull the strap to release the brake. A loud knock con fi rms the release of the brake.

) Take care to put the strap back in its location C correctly. Otherwise, it will no longer be possible to apply the brake. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

) Put the rubber mat back in place on the base of the armrest.

This strap does not permit application of the parking brake.

To re-engage the electric parking brake (after rectifying the malfunction or battery failure), give a long pull on the control A until the parking brake warning lamp (!) fl ashes in the instrument panel then give a second long pull until this warning lamp is on fi xed.

The time required for the subsequent application may be longer than during normal operation.

It is essential that the ignition is not switched on until the parking brake has re-engaged ( fl ashing of the warning lamp (!) in the instrument panel then the warning lamp on fi xed) to avoid damage to the parking brake.

Take care not to allow moisture or dust in the proximity of the diagnostic socket which is essential for the maintenance of your vehicle.

133

D R I V I N G

Operating faults

If any of these instances arises, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop as soon as possible.

SITUATION CONSEQUENCES

Electric parking brake fault and display of message " following warning lamps:

" and the

If the electric parking brake fault warning lamp and the service warning lamp light up, position the vehicle in a safe location (on fl at ground, with a gear engaged).

Display of the messages " faulty " and " following warning lamps: fault " and of the

- The automatic functions are deactivated.

- The hill start assist is not available.

- The electric parking brake is only available manually.

Display of messages " " and " Anti roll-back fault " and of the following warning lamp:

- Manual release of the electric parking brake is not available.

- The hill start assist is not available.

- The automatic functions and manual application are still available.

134

D R I V I N G

SITUATION

Display of messages " " and " Anti roll-back fault " and of the following warning lamps:

and/or fl ashing

CONSEQUENCES

- The automatic functions are deactivated.

- The hill start assist is not available.

To apply the electric parking brake:

) Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition

) Pull the control lever for at least 5 seconds or until maximum application.

) Switch on the ignition and check that the electric parking brake warning lamps are on.

- Application may take longer than in normal operation.

- If warning lamp (!) fl ashes or if the warning lamps do not come on when the ignition is switched on, this method does not work.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

To release the electric parking brake:

) Switch on the ignition.

) Push the control lever and hold it for approximately 3 seconds.

Parking brake control faulty – automatic mode activated " and the following warning lamps:

- Only the functions for automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic release on acceleration are available.

- Manual application/release of the electric parking brake and dynamic emergency braking are unavailable.

and/or fl ashing

Display of message " " and of the following warning lamp: fl ashing

Battery fault

- Application of the parking brake is not guaranteed.

- The parking brake is temporarily unavailable.

It this situation arises:

) Wait approximately 3 minutes.

) After 3 minutes, if the warning lamp is still fl ashing, try to reinitialise the parking brake, either by pushing and releasing the control A while pressing the brake pedal or by means of a long pull on control lever A .

- Illumination of the battery warning lamp makes it essential to stop the vehicle as soon as traf fi c allows. Stop and immobilise your vehicle.

- Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.

135

D R I V I N G

HILL START ASSIST

System which keeps your vehicle immobilised temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when starting on a gradient, the time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

This function is only active when:

- the vehicle is completely stationary, with your foot on the brake pedal,

- in certain conditions on a gradient,

- with the driver’s door closed.

The hill start assist function cannot be deactivated.

Operation

On an ascending gradient, with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle is held for a brief moment when you release the brake pedal:

- provided you are in fi rst gear or neutral on a manual gearbox,

- provided you are in D or M on an automatic gearbox.

On a descending gradient, with the vehicle stationary and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held for a brief moment when you release the brake pedal.

Do not exit the vehicle while it is being held in the hill start assist phase.

If you need to leave the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake manually and ensure that the parking brake warning lamp (in the instrument panel) is on fi xed

(not fl ashing).

136

5-SPEED MANUAL GEARBOX

D R I V I N G

6-SPEED MANUAL

GEARBOX

Starting the vehicle

) Check that the gear lever is in neutral.

) Do not touch the accelerator.

) For Diesel engines: turn the key to position and wait until the pre-heating warning lamp switches off if it has come on.

) Operate the starter, turning the key until the engine starts (no more than ten seconds).

) In temperatures lower than 0°C, declutch while operating the starter to facilitate starting.

Engaging reverse gear

) Push the gear lever to the right then rearwards.

Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.

Engaging reverse gear

) Raise the ring under the knob

(indicated by the arrow) and push the gear lever to the left then forwards.

Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle. IX

As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine:

- always select neutral,

- press the clutch pedal.

137

GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR *

System which reduces fuel consumption by advising the driver to change up on vehicles fi tted with a manual gearbox.

D R I V I N G

Example:

- You are in third gear.

The information appears in the instrument panel screen in the form of an arrow accompanied by the suggested gear.

Operation

The system intervenes only when driving economically.

Depending on the driving situation and your vehicle's equipment, the system may advise you to skip one or more gears. You can follow this instruction without engaging the intermediate gears.

The gear engagement recommendations must not be considered compulsory. In fact, the con fi guration of the road, the amount of traf fi c and safety remain determining factors when choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver remains responsible for deciding whether or not to follow the advice given by the system.

This function cannot be deactivated.

- You press the accelerator pedal moderately.

- The system may suggest that you engage a higher gear, if appropriate.

In the case of driving which makes particular demands on

( fi the performance of the engine rm pressure on the accelerator pedal, for example, when overtaking...), the system will not recommend a gear change.

The system never suggests:

- engaging reverse gear,

- engaging a lower gear.

138

* According to engine.

D R I V I N G

6-SPEED ELECTRONIC

GEARBOX SYSTEM

Six-speed electronic gearbox system which offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation or the pleasure of manual gear changing.

There are two driving modes:

- automatic operation for electronic control of the gears by the gearbox,

- manual operation for sequential gear changing by the driver,

In automated mode, it remains possible to change gear manually by using the steering mounted control paddles, when overtaking, for example.

A programme is available in automated mode, providing a more dynamic driving style.

Mode selection

) automatic mode: gear lever in position A ,

) sequential mode: gear lever in position M ,

) SPORT mode: gear lever in position A and a press on button 1 .

Steering mounted control paddles

Change up paddle to the right of the steering wheel.

) Press the back of the "+" steering mounted paddle to change up a gear.

Change down paddle to the left of the steering wheel.

) Press the back of the "-" steering mounted paddle to change down a gear.

The steering mounted paddles cannot be used to select neutral or to engage or disengage reverse gear.

139

Displays in the instrument panel

D R I V I N G

Moving off

) To start the engine, the gear lever must be in position N .

) Press the brake pedal down fully.

) Operate the starter

N appears in the instrument panel screen.

Reverse

) With your foot on the brake, push the lever forwards.

Only engage reverse with the vehicle immobilised.

To avoid any jerking, wait a moment before accelerating.

The position of the gear lever the the driving mode are displayed in dial C of the instrument panel.

A selection grille alongside the gear lever also allows you to see the selected position. N fl ashes in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, if the gear lever is not in position N on starting.

) Select rst gear (position M or A ) or reverse (position R ).

) Release the parking brake unless it is programmed in automatic mode.

) Release the brake pedal, then accelerate.

Neutral

Never select position with the vehicle moving.

140

Automatic operation

D R I V I N G

Manual gear changing

This selective gear change mode enables you to overtake, for example, while still remaining in automatic mode.

) Operate the + or steering mounted control paddle.

The gearbox engages the gear requested if the engine speed permits.

After a few moments without any action on the controls, the gearbox resumes automatic control of the gears.

The gear change requests are only carried out if the engine speed permits.

It is not necessary to release the accelerator during gear changes.

When braking or slowing down, the gearbox changes down automatically to allow vehicle to accelerate in the correct gear.

The programme is inoperative with sequential operation.

) Select position A .

The gearbox continuously selects the most suitable gear, depending on the:

- style of driving,

- pro fi le of the road,

Manual operation

On sharp acceleration, the gearbox will not change up unless the driver acts on the gear lever or the steering mounted paddles.

Never select neutral while the vehicle is moving.

Only engage reverse gear R when the vehicle is immobilised with the brake pedal pressed.

For optimum acceleration, for example when overtaking another vehicle, press the accelerator pedal fi rmly past the point of resistance.

) Select position M .

141

D R I V I N G

SPORT programme

) Wit the gear lever at and the engine running, press button S to activate the SPORT programme, which provides a more dynamic driving style.

S appears in the instrument panel.

) Press the button again to switch it off.

S then disappears from the instrument panel screen.

Stopping the vehicle

Before switching off the engine, you can choose to:

- move to position to engage neutral,

- leave the gear engaged; in this case, it will not be possible to move the vehicle.

In both cases, you must apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle.

Operating fault

With the ignition on, the fl ashing of

AUTO , accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, indicates a fault with the gearbox.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

You must press the brake pedal when starting the engine.

Whatever the circumstances, you must manually apply the parking brake when parking, unless the parking brake is programmed in automatic mode.

When immobilising the vehicle, with the engine running, you must place the gear lever in neutral N .

Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, check that the gear lever is in neutral and that the parking brake is applied.

142

D R I V I N G

STOP & START

The Stop & Start system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during stops in the traf fi c

(red lights, traf fi c jams, or other...).

The engine restarts automatically -

START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and silently.

Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary.

Operation

Going into engine STOP mode

The warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine goes into standby:

- with the electronic gearbox system , at speeds below 4 mph

(6 km/h), press the brake pedal or put the gear lever in position N .

If your vehicle is fi tted with the system, a time counter calculates the sum of the periods in

STOP mode during a journey. It rests itself to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.

For your comfort, during parking maoeuvres, STOP mode is not available for a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear.

STOP mode does not affect the functionality of the vehicle, such as for example, braking, power steering...

Special cases: STOP mode not available

STOP mode is not invoked when:

- the driver's door is open,

- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,

- the vehicle has not exceeded

6 mph (10 km/h) since the last engine start using the key,

- the electric parking brake is applied or being applied,

- the engine is needed to maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment,

- demisting is active,

- some special conditions (battery charge, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed to assure control of a system.

Never refuel with the engine in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.

In this case, the warning lamp fl ashes for a few seconds then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal.

143

D R I V I N G

Going into engine START mode

The warning lamp goes off and the engine starts with the electronic gearbox system :

● gear lever in position A or M , release the brake pedal,

● or gear lever in position N and the brake pedal released, move the gear lever to position A or M ,

● or engage reverse gear.

Special cases: START invoked automatically

START mode is invoked automatically when:

- the driver's door is open,

- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,

- the speed of the vehicle exceeds

7 mph (11 km/h) with the electronic gearbox system,

- the electric parking brake is being applied,

- some special conditions (battery charge, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed for control of a system.

Deactivation

At any time, press the switch to deactivate the system.

This is con fi rmed by the switch warning lamp coming on accompanied by a message in the screen.

In this case the warning lamp fl ashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal.

If the system has been deactivated in STOP mode, the engine restarts immediately.

Reactivation

Press the switch again.

The system is active again; this is con fi rmed by the switch warning lamp going off and a message in the screen.

The system is reactivated automatically at every new start using the key.

144

Operating fault

D R I V I N G

Maintenance

Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the

Stop & Start system to avoid any risk of injury resulting from automatic operation of START mode.

In the event of a fault with the system, the "ECO OFF" switch warning lamp fl ashes then comes on continuously.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the vehicle may stall. It is then necessary to switch off the ignition and start the engine again using the key.

This system requires a battery with a special speci fi cation and technology (reference numbers available from CITROËN dealers).

Fitting a battery not listed by

CITROËN malfunction of the system.

The Stop & Start system makes use of advanced technology. For any work on the system go to a quali fi ed workshop with the skills and equipment required, which a CITROËN dealer is able to provide.

145

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

D R I V I N G

Mode selection Displays in the instrument panel

Automatic gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation, enhanced by the sport and snow programmes, or manual gear changing.

Four driving modes are provided:

- automatic operation for electronic control of the gears by the gearbox,

- the programme for a more dynamic driving style,

- the programme to improve driving when the grip is poor,

- manual operation for sequential changing of the gears by the driver.

) automatic mode: gear lever in position D ,

) sequential mode: gear lever in position M ,

) SPORT mode: gear lever in position D and button A pressed,

) SNOW mode: gear lever in position D and button B pressed.

The position of the gear lever and the driving mode are displayed in the instrument panel dial .

A position grille associated with the gear lever allows you to view the selected position.

For safety:

- position can be disengaged only if you press the brake pedal,

- when a door is opened, an audible signal is heard if the gear lever is not in position P ,

- always make sure that the gear lever is in position P before you leave your vehicle.

If the gearbox is in position but the position of the gear lever is different, reposition the gear lever on

P so that you can start the vehicle.

146

D R I V I N G

Moving off

) To start the engine, the gear lever must be in position P or N .

) Operate the starter.

) When the engine is running, place the gear lever on

M as required.

R , or

) Check, in the instrument panel, the position engaged.

) Release the brake pedal and accelerate.

) To avoid a possible difference between the position of the gear lever and the actual position of the gearbox, always exit from position with the ignition on and brake pedal applied.

Otherwise, when the ignition is on or the engine is running:

) reposition the gear lever in position P ,

) put your foot on the brake pedal and then select the gear you want.

Park

This position of the gear lever is used to prevent the vehicle from moving when you are stationary.

) To select position move the gear lever back to the highest

R ), then push it forwards and then to the left.

) To exit position P , move the gear lever to the right and then to the position you want.

) Only engage this position when the vehicle is completely stationary. In this position, the front wheels are locked. Make sure that the gear lever is correctly positioned.

Reverse gear

Only engage this position when the vehicle is stationary. To prevent snatching, do not accelerate too soon after selection.

Neutral

Never select position if the vehicle is moving.

Never select positions P or if the vehicle is not stationary.

If, while the vehicle is moving, position is engaged inadvertently, allow the engine to idle before engaging position D or M .

147

Automatic operation

D R I V I N G

When braking, the gearbox may change down automatically in order to provide effective engine braking.

If you lift your foot off the accelerator abruptly, the gearbox will not engage a higher gear.

Manual operation

- If the vehicle stops or reduces speed (for example when approaching a stop sign), the gearbox changes down automatically to fi rst gear.

- In sequential mode, it is not necessary to release the accelerator during gear changes.

- A request to change gear is accepted only if the engine speed permits it.

- The mode.

and modes do not operate in sequential

) Move the gear lever to position D .

The gearbox constantly selects the gear that is best suited to the following parameters:

- driving style,

- road pro fi le

- vehicle load.

The gearbox operates without requiring any intervention on your part.

For certain manoeuvres (for example overtaking), you can obtain maximum acceleration by pressing the accelerator pedal hard down past the point of resistance, which then produces an automatic change down to a lower gear.

Position of the gear lever for manual gear changing.

) Move the gear lever to position M .

) Push the gear lever towards the

" + " sign to change up a gear.

) Pull the gear lever towards the " " sign to change down a gear.

148

SPORT and SNOW programmes

D R I V I N G

SNOW programme " "

) With the gear lever in position D and the engine running, press button B .

The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery roads.

This programme makes moving off easier and improves traction in conditions of poor grip.

7 appears in the instrument panel.

A strong snatch may be felt

R for reverse gear.

In the event of a fault, the gearbox is blocked in one gear; do not exceed a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h).

Do not turn off the engine while the gear selector is in position D R .

Never press the accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously.

Braking and acceleration should be done with the right foot only.

Pressing both pedals simultaneously may damage the gearbox.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

These two special programmes supplement the automatic operation in very particular conditions of use.

Return to automatic operation

) At any time, press the button selected again to exit from the programme engaged and return to auto-adaptive mode.

SPORT programme "S"

) With the gear lever in position and the engine running, press button A .

The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic driving style.

S appears in the instrument panel.

149

D R I V I N G

FIXED CENTRED CONTROLS STEERING WHEEL

Rotation

- Scroll the various pages of information on the instrument panel screen.

- Move through the various menus on the instrument panel screen.

Short press

Long press

7 Short press

Short press

Long press

Short press

Maintained press

Short press

Maintained press

Short press

- Open the menu on the instrument panel screen (only when stationary).

- Select and con fi rm information.

Trip computer zero reset (if the trip computer page is displayed).

- Cancel the current operation.

- Return to the previous screen on the instrument panel screen.

Return to the initial page on the instrument panel screen.

Increase the speed in steps of 1 mph (1 km/h)/storing the speed.

Increase the speed in steps of 5 mph (5 km/h).

Decrease the speed in steps of 1 mph (1 km/h)/storing the speed.

Decrease the speed in steps of 5 mph (5 km/h).

Suspend or resume cruise control/speed limiter (depending on the mode selected).

Select cruise control or speed limiter mode (the cycle on this button will always begin with selection of the speed limiter).

Deactivate cruise control/speed limiter.

Short press

- Pick up an incoming call.

- Hang up the current call.

- Open the telephone short-cut menu.

- Con fi rm on the list and the telephone menu.

Refuse an incoming call. Long press

9 Short press/Long press Horn.

10 Short press Activate/deactivate Black Panel mode (night driving).

Short press

Long press

Activate the voice command.

Navigation instruction repeat.

150

D R I V I N G

Rotation

Short press

Long press

Short press

Long press

14 Short press

- Radio source: Scroll the pre-set stations.

- CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Scroll the

CDs or directories.

- On the multifunction screen menus: Movement and increase/decrease.

- On the multifunction screen menus: con fi rm.

- Open the short-cut menus (depending on the multifunction screen page).

Open the multifunction screen main menu.

Cancel the current operation and return to the previous page on the multifunction screen.

When an incoming telephone call is received: Refuse the call.

Return to the initial page on the multifunction screen.

Access to the multifunction screen general menu.

15 Short press/Maintained press Volume increase.

16 Short press/Maintained press Volume decrease.

Short press

- First press: mute.

- Second press: restore sound.

- Radio source: Automatic search of higher frequencies.

- CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Search for the next track.

Maintained press - CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Fast forward play.

Short press

- Radio source: Automatic search of lower frequencies.

- CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Search for the previous track.

Maintained press

Short press

Long press

CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Fast backwards.

- Radio source: display the list of radio stations available.

- CD/MP3 CD and CD changer source: display the list of

CD tracks and directories.

- Jukebox source: display the list of albums.

Update the list of radio stations.

21 Short press/Long press Horn.

22 Short press MODE: selection of the type of information presented on the multifunction screen.

151

D R I V I N G

SPEED LIMITER

System which prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.

When the limit speed is reached, the accelerator pedal no longer has any effect.

The speed limiter is switched on manually: a speed of at least

20 mph (approx. 30 km/h) must be programmed.

The speed limiter can in no way replace respect for speed limits or vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.

Steering mounted controls

Displays in the instrument panel

The speed limiter information is dis-

A of the instrument panel.

Programming

) Press on button 4 to select speed limiter mode " LIMIT ".

The selection is con fi rmed by the

A of the instrument panel.

The speed limiter switches are located on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.

Successive presses will modify the maximum speed in steps of 1 mph and a continuous press in steps of

5 mph.

Activation

When the function is selected, the last memorised speed and the information "PAUSE" are displayed.

With the engine running, you can adjust the memorised maximum speed, displayed in zone , by pressing on:

) Button to increase the memorised maximum speed.

) Button to decrease the memorised maximum speed.

) Press on button when the desired maximum speed is displayed.

The information then appears in zone A .

152

D R I V I N G

Suspension/Resumption

) Press on button 3 .

This action causes the information

"PAUSE" to appear in zone A of the instrument panel.

This action does not cancel the memorised maximum speed which remains displayed in zone of the instrument panel.

Overriding the programmed speed

The accelerator pedal has an endof-travel switch. In order to exceed the memorised maximum speed at any time, you can press the pedal all the way down. While the speed is being exceeded, the speed displayed in zone A will fl ash. You have only to release the accelerator pedal to return below the maximum speed, to restore the function.

The speed will also fl ash if the speed limiter is not able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed (e.g. on a steep descent or under excessive acceleration).

To reactivate the speed limiter, release the accelerator to slow to a speed lower than the programmed speed.

Return to normal driving

) Either press on button 5 .

) Or select the speed limiter function.

) Or stop the engine.

Operating fault

If there is a fault, a message is displayed accompanied by an audible signal and illumination of the

SERVICE warning lamp.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

In the event of a steep descent or under excessive acceleration, the speed limiter (which does not act on the brakes) may not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed.

Use of a fl oor mat other than that recommended by CITROËN may affect the normal operation of the accelerator pedal and hamper the operation of the speed limiter.

Floor mats approved by CITROËN are fi tted with a 3rd fi xing located in the pedal area to avoid any risk of interference with the pedals.

153

D R I V I N G

CRUISE CONTROL

System which automatically maintains the vehicle speed programmed by the driver, without any action on the accelerator pedal.

The cruise control is switched on manually: the vehicle speed must be at least 25 mph (40 km/h) and you must be in at least:

- 4th gear for manual gearboxes,

- 2nd gear for automatic gearboxes.

Displays in the instrument panel

Steering mounted controls

The cruise control switches are located on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.

Once the desired speed has been reached using the accelerator, press button or button . The cruising speed is then memorised and cruise control is activated. The cruising speed is displayed in zone instrument panel, and played.

A of the

"ON" is dis-

The programmed information is

A of the instrument panel.

Programming

) Press button to select cruise control mode " CRUISE ".

You can then release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will automatically keep to the speed chosen.

The vehicle speed may vary slightly from that memorised.

If during cruise control the system cannot keep to the cruise speed

(e.g. on a steep descent), then the speed fl ashes. If necessary, brake to curb your speed.

The selection is con fi rmed by the

A of the instrument panel. no cruising speed has yet been memorised.

Adjustment of the memorised speed while cruise control is in operation

You can adjust the memorised

A , by pressing:

Successive presses will modify the cruise speed in steps of 1 mph and a continuous press in steps of 5 mph.

154

D R I V I N G

Overriding the programmed speed

While cruise control is in operation, it is always possible to go above the programmed speed simply by pressing the accelerator pedal (for example to overtake another vehicle).

The speed displayed in zone fl ashes.

You only have to release the accelerator pedal to return to the programmed speed.

Suspension/Resumption

) Either by pressing the brake pedal or the clutch pedal.

) Or by pressing button 3 .

) Or by the ESP or ASR systems being active.

For vehicles with a manual gearbox, cruise control is deactivated if the gear lever is in neutral.

Reactivation

- By recalling the memorised speed

After deactivation, press button 3 .

Your vehicle automatically returns to the memorised cruising speed.

"ON" are displayed in zone A .

If the memorised cruising speed is higher than the current speed, the vehicle will accelerate strongly to reach the current speed.

- By selecting the current speed

Press button 1 or 2 once the desired speed has been reached.

The new speed and will appear in zone A .

"PAUSE" will be displayed in zone of the instrument panel.

These actions do not cancel the cruising speed which remains displayed on the instrument panel.

Return to normal driving

) Either press on button 5 .

) Or select the cruise control function.

) Or stop the engine.

The speed that was chosen is no longer memorised.

Operating fault

If there is a fault, a message is displayed accompanied by an audible signal and illumination of the

SERVICE warning lamp.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Cruise control must only be used wh re the traf tions permit driving at a constant speed . fi c condi-

Do not use it on congested roads or when the weather or the road conditions are poor .

The driver must remain attentive and in complete control of the vehicle

You are recommended to keep your feet within range of the pedals .

155

D R I V I N G

LANE DEPARTURE

WARNING SYSTEM

System which detects the involuntary crossing of longitudinal traf fi c lane markings on the ground (solid or broken line).

Sensors, fi tted below the front bumper, trigger a warning if the vehicle drifts over a lane marking (speed higher than 50 mph (80 km/h)).

This system is particularly useful on motorways and main roads.

The lane departure warning system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.

Activation

) Press this button, the indicator lamp comes on.

156

Deactivation

) Press this button again, the indicator lamp goes off.

The status of the system remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

Detection

You are warned by the vibration of the driver's seat cushion:

- on the right-hand side, if the marking on the ground has been crossed on the right,

- on the left-hand side, if the marking on the ground has been crossed on the left.

No warning is transmitted while the direction indicator is active and for approximately 20 seconds after the direction indicator is switched off.

A warning may be transmitted if a direction marking (e.g. arrow) or non-standard marking (e.g. graf fi ti) is crossed.

Operating fault

In the event of a malfunction, the service warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

The detection may be impeded:

- if the sensors are dirty (mud, snow...),

- if the markings on the ground are worn,

- if there is little contrast between the markings on the ground and the road surface.

PARKING SPACE SENSOR

D R I V I N G

System which measures the parking space available between two vehicles or obstacles. It measures the size of the space and gives you information on:

- the possibility of fi tting into a free space, depending on the dimensions of your vehicle and the distances necessary for your manoeuvring,

- the level of dif fi culty of the manoeuvre to be performed.

The system does not measure spaces which are clearly much smaller or larger than the size of the vehicle.

Displays in the instrument panel

The parking space sensor function warning lamp can have three different states:

- off: the function is not selected,

- on fi the function is selected but the conditions for measuring are not yet met (direction indicator not operating, speed too high) or the measurement is terminated.

- fl ashing: measurement is in progress or the message is being displayed.

You can select the "parking space sensor" function by pressing button A .

The fi xed illumination of the warning lamp indicates that the function is selected.

During the measurement, the message "Measurement in progress -

Vmax 20 km/h (12 mph)" is displayed in the instrument panel screen. IX

157

D R I V I N G

Operation

You have identi fi ed a parking space:

) Press button A to select the function.

) Activate the direction indicator on the side where the space is to be measured.

) During measurement, go forward the length of the space, at a speed less than 12 mph (approx. 20 km/h), to prepare for your manoeuvre.

The function displays the following types of message:

Parking YES

The system then measures the size of the space.

Parking dif fi cult

The function deselects itself automatically:

- when you engage reverse gear,

- when you switch off the ignition,

- if measurement is not requested, fi ve minutes of selection of the function,

- if the vehicle speed exceeds the threshold of 45 mph (approx.

70 km/h) for one minute.

If the lateral distance between your vehicle and the parking space is too large, the system may not be able to measure the space.

The function remains available after each measurement and thus can measure more than one space during your search.

In bad weather conditions or in winter, make sure that the sensors are not covered by dirt, or by ice or snow.

The parking space sensor function deactivates the front parking sensors during space measurement when you are in forward gear.

) The system informs you of the level of dif fi culty of the manoeuvre via a message in the instrument panel screen accompanied by an audible signal.

) Depending on the message issued by the system, you may or may not be able to perform the manoeuvre.

Parking NO

If there is a fault, have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

158

VISUAL AND AUDIBLE

FRONT AND/OR REAR

PARKING SENSORS

System consisting of proximity sensors, installed in the front and/or rear bumper.

It detects any obstacle (person, vehicle, tree, barrier...) located in front of or behind the vehicle, however, it will not be able to detect obstacles located immediately below the bumper.

An object, such as a stake, a roadworks cone or any other similar object may be detected at the start of the manoeuvre but may no longer be detected when the vehicle moves nearer to it.

D R I V I N G

The parking sensors are switched on :

- by engaging reverse gear,

- at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h) in forward gear.

This is accompanied by an audible signal and/or displaying of the vehicle on the multifunction screen.

The proximity information is indicated by:

- an audible signal which becomes more rapid as the vehicle approaches the obstacle,

- a diagram on the multifunction display, with blocks which move closer to the vehicle.

The obstacle is located in relation to the emission of the audible signal by the speakers; front or rear and right or left.

When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than approximately thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes continuous and/or the "Danger" symbol appears, depending on the multifunction screen version.

The parking sensors system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.

Deactivation

) Press button A , the warning lamp comes on, the system is fully deactivated.

The system will be deactivated automatically when a trailer is being towed or when a bicycle carrier is fi tted (vehicle fi tted with a towbar or bicycle carrier recommended by

CITROËN).

The parking sensors are off :

- when you exit reverse gear,

- when the speed is higher than

6 mph (10 km/h) in forward gear,

- when the vehicle has been stationary for more than three seconds in forward gear.

159

D R I V I N G

Reactivation

) Press button A again, the warning lamp switches off, the system is reactivated.

In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered with mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is engaged, an audible signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors may be dirty.

When the speed of the vehicle is below about 6 mph (10 km/h), some sources of noise (motorcycle, lorry, pneumatic drill, ...) may trigger the audible parking sensor signals.

"HYDRACTIVE III +"

ELECTRONIC SUSPENSION

Display in the instrument panel

The suspension mode selected is displayed in the instrument panel screen.

Normal mode

This mode favours soft damping for maximum comfort.

If the speed authorised for a particular position is exceeded, the vehicle reverts automatically to the normal road position.

The suspension automatically and instantly adjusts to different driving styles and to the pro fi le of the road, providing the best compromise between occupant comfort and vehicle road holding.

The system alternates between soft and fi rm suspension settings, maximising comfort at the same time as constantly ensuring the highest level of safety. It also automatically corrects ride height, according to the vehicle load and driving conditions.

In addition, the "Hydractive III +" system allows you to choose between two modes of suspension.

A change of suspension mode can be made either when the vehicle is moving or when stationary, by press-

A .

SPORT mode

This mode favours dynamic driving.

The warning lamp on button A comes on in addition to the message in the instrument panel screen.

SPORT mode is retained when you switch off the engine.

160

D R I V I N G

Vehicle positions

High position

Changing a wheel (not possible if speed > 6mph (10km/h)).

Normal position

If the speed authorised for a particular position is exceeded, the vehicle reverts automatically to the normal position.

Position changes may only be made when the engine is running.

The adjustable ground clearance meets all types of situation. Apart from a few speci fi c situations, the vehicle should be in the Normal position.

) Press once on one of the adjustment controls.

The change in position is indicated by a message on the instrument panel screen.

Mid-high position

For increased ground clearance (not possible if speed > 25 mph (40 km/h)).

For use on dif fi cult roads when travelling at reduced speed, as well as on car park ramps.

Low position

To facilitate loading or unloading the vehicle.

For workshop inspections.

Not to be used in normal driving (not possible if speed > 6mph (10km/h)).

161

D R I V I N G

Request not granted

The instrument panel screen temporarily displays a message indicating that this position is not authorised.

The vehicle remains in the authorised position and the instrument panel screen indicates this position to you.

Automatic variation of ground clearance

- If your speed exceeds 70 mph

(approx. 110 km/h), on a good road surface, ground clearance is lowered. The vehicle returns to its normal position if the road surface deteriorates or if your speed is lower than 55 mph (approx. 90 km/h).

- At low or medium speed, if the road surface is poor, ground clearance is increased. The vehicle returns to its normal position as soon as conditions allow.

- On switching off the ignition, the ground clearance is reduced to the parking position

For your safety if you are operating underneath the vehicle, you must support the vehicle with axle stands.

162

C H E C K S

TOTAL & CITROËN

PARTNERS IN PERFORMANCE

AND PROTECTING

THE ENVIRONMENT

Innovation in the search for performance

For over 40 year, the TOTAL Research and

Development departments have developed for CITROËN, lubricants to match the latest technical innovations on CITROËN vehicles, both for competition and for everyday motoring.

For you, this is an assurance that you will obtain of the best performance for your engine.

Optimum protection for your engine

By having your CITROËN vehicle serviced with TOTAL lubricants, you are contributing towards improving the life and performances of your engine, while also protecting the environment. prefers

C H E C K S

BONNET

Opening

Before doing anything under the bonnet, switch off the Stop &

Start system to avoid any risk of injury resulting from an automatic change to START mode.

) At the front of the bonnet, lift

B and raise the bonnet.

When the engine is hot, handle the safety catch and bonnet stay with care (risk of burns).

The location of the interior release lever prevents opening of the bonnet while the left hand front door is closed.

This operation must only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary.

Avoid opening the bonnet in strong winds.

Closing

) Take the stay out of the support notch.

) Clip the stay in its housing.

) Lower the bonnet then slam it fi rmly at the end of its travel.

) Pull on the bonnet to check that it is fully closed.

) Open the left hand front door.

) Pull the interior bonnet release lever A , located at the bottom of the door frame.

) Unclip the stay from its housing and pivot it to insert it in the notch D indicated by a yellow arrow.

) Fix the stay in the notch to hold the bonnet open.

BLEEDING THE DIESEL FUEL

FILTER

Protective cover

C H E C K S

Re fi

) Firstly clip in at 2 .

) Lower and centre the cover.

) Clip in at and , pushing vertically and gently from the rear.

) Clip in at 1 pushing vertically.

Bleeding water from the fuel filter

Removing the cover

HDi 140 engine

) Remove the protective cover by fi rst unclipping at 3 , then 1 and 4 .

) Unclip at by pulling towards you, then lift up.

HDi 110, HDi 160 and V6 HDi 240 engines

) Pull the protective cover upwards to remove it.

Bleed regularly (at each oil change).

To bleed the water, slacken the bleed screw or the water in diesel fuel sensor, located at the base of the fi lter.

Continue until all the water has fl owed out.

Then tighten the bleed screw or the water detection sensor.

C H E C K S

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

(DIESEL)

If the engine fails to start at the fi rst attempt, wait fi fteen seconds before trying again.

If the engine fails to start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again and then try to start the engine.

When the engine is idling, accelerate slightly to complete the bleeding of the circuit.

HDi 110 engine

) Unclip the protective cover to gain access to the priming pump.

HDi 140 and HDi 160 engines

) Unclip the protective cover to gain access to the priming pump.

Priming the fuel system

In the event of running out of fuel:

) after lling (minimum 5 litres) and removing the protective cover, operate the manual priming pump, until some resistance is felt,

) operate the starter motor while depressing the accelerator pedal slightly until the engine starts.

V6 HDi 240 engine with electric pump

In the event of running out of fuel:

) after adding fuel, turn the ignition

M , wait for a few seconds,

) operate the starter motor until the engine starts.

If the engine fails to start after several attempts, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

HDi engines make use of advanced technology.

For any work on your vehicle, contact a quali fi ed workshop that has the skills and equipment required, which a CITROËN dealer is able to provide.

1.6i THP

C H E C K S

PETROL ENGINES

The various caps and covers allow access for checking fl uid levels and for replacing certain components.

Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.

Power steering uid reservoir or power steering and suspension fl uid reservoir.

Engine coolant header tank.

Engine oil dipstick.

Engine oil ller cap.

Brake uid reservoir.

Battery.

Air lter.

1.6i VTi

168

2.0i 16V

C H E C K S

Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.

Power steering uid reservoir or power steering and suspension fl uid reservoir.

Engine coolant header tank.

Engine oil dipstick.

Engine oil ller cap.

Brake uid reservoir.

Battery.

Air lter.

Vehicles fi tted with the 2.0i 16v engine may be fi tted with metal spring suspension. In this case, a different power steering fl uid reservoir is fi tted.

HDi 110 / e-HDi 110

HDi 140

C H E C K S

DIESEL ENGINES

The various caps and covers allow access for checking fl uid levels, for replacing certain components and for priming the fuel system.

Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.

Power steering uid reservoir or power steering and suspension fl uid reservoir, depending on equipment.

Engine coolant header tank.

Engine oil dipstick.

Engine oil ller cap.

Air lter.

Brake uid reservoir.

Battery.

As the Diesel fuel system operates under high pressure, any work on the fuel system is prohibited.

Vehicles fi tted with the engine may be fi tted with metal spring suspension. In this case, a different power steering fl uid reservoir is fi tted.

169

170

HDi 160

C H E C K S

HDi 160 - HDi 200 engines

(with particle emissions filter)

Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.

Power steering and suspension fl uid reservoir.

Engine coolant header tank.

Engine oil dipstick.

Engine oil ller cap.

Air lter.

Brake uid reservoir.

Battery.

As the Diesel fuel system operates under high pressure:

- All work on the fuel system is prohibited.

- HDi engines make use of advanced technology.

All maintenance and repairs require special quali fi cations which only a

CITROËN dealer can guarantee.

HDi 200

V6 HDi 240

C H E C K S

V6 HDi 240 engine (with particle emissions filter)

Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.

Power steering and suspension fl uid reservoir.

Engine coolant header tank.

Engine oil dipstick.

Engine oil ller cap.

Air lter.

Brake uid reservoir.

"+" and "-" terminals for emergency starting with a slave battery.

As the Diesel fuel system operates under high pressure:

- All work on the fuel system is prohibited.

- HDi engines make use of advanced technology.

All maintenance and repairs require special quali fi cations which only a

CITROËN dealer can guarantee.

171

C H E C K S

CHECKING LEVELS

Check all of these levels regularly and top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.

If a level drops signi fi cantly, have the corresponding system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Oil level

The reading will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than

30 minutes.

The check is carried out either when the ignition is switched on using the oil level indicator in the instrument panel, or using the dipstick.

Check this level also between each scheduled service and before long journeys.

Take care when doing anything under the bonnet, as some parts of the engine can be extremely hot

(risk of burns).

Dipstick

There are 2 marks on the dipstick:

- A = max; never exceed this level,

- B = min; top up the level via the oil fi ller cap, using the type of oil suited to your engine.

Oil change

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the interval for this operation.

In order to maintain the reliability of the engine and emission control system, the use of additives in the engine oil is prohibited.

Brake fluid level

The brake fl uid level should be close to the "MAX" mark.

If it is not, check the brake pad wear.

Fluid change

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the interval for this operation.

This fl uid must be changed regularly. Fluid which has been used for too long may cause a loss of braking ef fi ciency.

Fluid speci fi

The brake fl uid must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and meet the DOT4 standard.

Power steering fluid or power steering and suspension fluid level

This fl uid must be topped up by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Oil speci fi

The oil must correspond to your engine and conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

172

C H E C K S

Coolant level

The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" mark but should never exceed it.

When the engine is warm, the temperature of the coolant is regulated by the fan. This can operate with the ignition off.

On vehicles which are fi tted with a particle emission fi may operate after the vehicle has been switched off, even if the engine is cold.

In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised, wait at least one hour after switching off the engine before carrying out any work.

To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. When the pressure has dropped, remove the cap and top up the level.

Screenwash and headlamp wash fluid

In the case of vehicles fi tted with headlamp washers, the minimum level of this fl uid is indicated by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.

Top up the level when you stop the vehicle.

Fluid speci fi

For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing, this fl uid must not be topped up or replaced with plain water.

Reservoir capacities:

- screenwash: approximately 3.5 litres,

- screenwash and headlamp wash: approximately 6.15 litres.

Coolant change

The coolant does not have to be changed.

Fluid speci fi

The coolant must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Diesel additive level

(Diesel engine with particle emission filter)

The additive reservoir low level is indicated by fi xed illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible warning and a message in the multifunction screen.

Topping up

This additive must be topped up by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop without delay.

Used products

Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or fl uids with the skin.

Most of these fl uids are harmful to health or indeed very corrosive.

Do not discard used oil or fl uids into sewers or onto the ground.

Take used oil to a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop

(France) or to an authorised waste disposal site.

173

C H E C K S

CHECKS

Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the servicing booklet and according to your engine.

Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Battery

The battery does not require any maintenance.

However, check that the terminals are clean and correctly tightened, particularly in summer and winter.

When carrying out work on the battery, refer to the "Practical information" section for details of the precautions to be taken before disconnecting the battery and following its reconnection.

The presence of this label, in particular with the Stop & Start system, indicates the use of a speci fi c 12 V lead-acid battery with special technology and speci fi cation, for which the involvement of a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop is required when replacing or disconnecting the battery.

Failure to observe this recommendation may shorten the life of the battery.

174

Air filter and passenger compartment filter

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the replacement intervals for these components.

Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), if necessary (refer to the "Engines" section).

A clogged passenger compartment fi lter may have an adverse effect on the performance of the air conditioning system and generate undesirable odours.

Particle filter system (Diesel)

Complementary to the catalytic converter, this fi lter makes an active contribution to the preservation of air quality by the retaining of the unburnt pollutant particles. Black exhaust fumes are thus no longer emitted.

After prolonged idling or driving at very low speeds, you may occasionally notice water vapour being emitted from the exhaust when accelerating. This is of no consequence to the running of the vehicle or to the environment.

Oil filter

Replace the oil fi lter each time the engine oil is changed.

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the replacement interval for this component.

If there is risk of blockage, a message appears in the instrument panel screen, accompanied by an audible signal and illumination of the service warning lamp.

This alert tells you that the particle fi lter is starting to fi ll up (in conditions of urban driving of exceptionally long duration: low speeds, traf fi c jams etc.)

To regenerate the fi lter, it is advised to drive as soon as possible, when traf fi c conditions permit, at a speed of 40 mph (around 60 km/h) or more for at least fi ve minutes (until the alert message disappears).

If this alert persists, consult a

CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Manual gearbox

The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).

Refer to the servicing booklet for the details of the level checking interval for this component.

Automatic gearbox

The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the level checking interval for this component.

C H E C K S

Brake disc wear

For information on checking brake disc wear, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Parking brake

If a loss of effectiveness of this system is noticed, the parking brake must be checked, even between two services.

This system must be checked by a

CITROËN dealer.

Only use products recommended by CITROËN or products of equivalent quality and speci fi cations.

Do not use a dry cloth with an abrasive product for the maintenance of aluminium parts; use a sponge and soapy water.

In order to optimise the operation of units as important as the braking system, CITROËN selects and offers very speci fi c products.

To avoid damaging the electrical units, the use of a high pressure washer in the engine compartment is strictly prohibited .

Brake pads

Brake wear depends on the style of driving, particularly in the case of vehicles used in town, over short distances. It may be necessary to have the condition of the brakes checked, even between vehicle services.

Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the brake fl uid level indicates that the brake pads are worn.

175

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

TEMPORARY PUNCTURE

REPAIR KIT

Complete system consisting of a compressor and a sealant cartridge which permits the temporary repair of the tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage.

Using the kit

) Switch off the ignition.

) Af fi x the speed limitation sticker to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind you that a wheel is in temporary use.

) Check that the switch is in position "0" .

) Connect the pipe of the cartridge 1 to the valve of the tyre to be repaired.

The kit is located in the boot under the fl oor.

This repair kit is available from

CITROËN dealers or a quali fi ed workshop.

It is designed to repair holes of a maximum diameter of 6 mm, located exclusively on the tyre tread or shoulder. Avoid removing any foreign bodies which have penetrated the tyre.

176

) Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.

) Start the vehicle and leave the engine running.

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

) Switch on the compressor by moving the switch to position until the tyre pressure reaches

2.0 bars.

If this pressure has not been reached after approximately fi ve to ten minutes, the tyre cannot be repaired; contact a

CITROËN dealer to have your vehicle repaired.

) Remove the compressor and unclip and store the cartridge in a sealed bag to avoid staining your vehicle with traces of fl uid.

) Drive immediately for approximately two miles (three kilometres), at reduced speed (between

15 and 35 mph [20 and 60 km/h]), to plug the puncture.

) Stop to check the repair and the pressure.

) Connect the compressor pipe directly to the valve of the repaired wheel.

177

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

) Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket again.

) Start the vehicle again and leave the engine running.

Take care as sealant cartridge contains ethyleneglycol. This product is harmful if swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes. Keep it out of reach of children.

The expiry date of the sealant is indicated on the base of the cartridge.

The cartridge is designed for a single use; even if only partly used, it must be replaced.

After use, do not discard the cartridge into the environment, take it to a CITROËN dealer or an authorised waste disposal site.

Do not forget to obtain a new cartridge, available from CITROËN dealers or a quali fi ed workshop.

) Adjust the pressure using the compressor (to in fl ate: switch A in position "1" ; to de fl ate: switch A in position and press button ), in accordance with the vehicle's tyre pressure label (located on the door aperture on the left-hand side), then remember to check that the leak has been plugged correctly (no further loss of pressure after several miles [kilometres]).

) Remove the compressor, then store the whole kit.

) Drive at reduced speed (50 mph

[80 km/h] max) limiting the distance travelled to approximately

120 miles (200 km).

) Visit a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop as soon as possible to have the tyre repaired or replaced by a technician.

If the vehicle is fi tted with tyre under-in fl ation detection, the tyre under-in fl ation warning lamp will remain on after the wheel has been repaired until the system is reinitialised by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

178

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

CHANGING A WHEEL

Access to the tools

The tools are to be found in a protective holder inside the spare wheel.

) Pull back the retaining strap for access.

List of tools

All of these tools are speci fi c to your vehicle and may vary according to equipment. Do not use them for any other purpose.

Wheelbrace

Jack

Tool for the removal/re fi tting of bolt protectors

Towing eye

Moveable chock

179

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Access to the spare wheel

To remove the spare wheel

) Lift up the boot fl oor and fold in two (Saloon) or hook it using the retractable handle (Tourer).

) Detach the strap then push the wheel forwards so as to be able to lift it.

To reposition the spare wheel

) Position the spare wheel fl at in the boot, then pull it towards you.

) Next place the toolbox inside the wheel, then secure the assembly with the strap.

) Release the boot fl oor to return it to its initial position.

The tyre pressures are indicated on the label located on the driver's side centre door pillar. Tyre pressures are given for different vehicle loading conditions.

180

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Removing a wheel

) Continue to extend the jack until the wheel is a few centimetres off the ground.

) Undo the bolts, remove the wheel.

) Park the vehicle on stable, fi rm ground that is not slippery. apply the parking brake.

) If your vehicle is equipped with

"Hydractive III+" suspension, with the engine running at idle, adjust the ground clearance to its maximum height.

) Switch off the ignition and engage fi rst gear or reverse gear depending on any slope (for a vehicle with automatic gearbox, select position P ).

) If your vehicle is fi tted with

"Hydractive III+" suspension, position the chock, whichever direction the gradient may be in, in front of the front wheel diametrically opposite to the one to be replaced.

) Position the jack at one of the four jacking-points provided on the underbody close to the wheels, then use the wheelbrace to unwind the jack until it reaches the ground.

Before positioning the jack:

) Always adjust the vehicle’s ground clearance to the "maximum height" position and retain this adjustment for as long as the jack is under the vehicle

(do not use the hydraulic adjustments),

) Immobilise your vehicle on horizontal, stable and non-slippery ground,

) Ensure that any passengers have left the vehicle and are in a safe place .

Never get underneath the vehicle if it is supported only by the jack.

The jack and all of the tools are speci fi c to your vehicle. Do not use them for any other applications.

Have the original wheel repaired and re fi tted as soon as possible.

) Remove the protector from each bolt using tool 3 .

) Slacken the wheel bolts.

181

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Wheel for temporary use

Your vehicle may be fi tted with a spare wheel which is different to those on the vehicle. When fi tting the spare wheel, it is normal to notice that the wheel bolt washers do not come into contact with the wheel rim. The spare wheel is secured by the conical tapering of the wheel bolt’s shaft.

When re fi tting the original wheel, ensure that the wheel bolt contact surfaces are clean and in good condition.

Fitting a wheel

) Fit the wheel on the hub, using the centring guide. Make sure that the contact surface between the hub and the wheel is clean.

) Screw in the bolts but do not fully tighten them.

) Lower the jack and remove it.

) Tighten the wheel bolts, using the wheelbrace.

) Re fi t the protectors on the bolts.

) Return the ground clearance to the normal position.

) Ensure the tyre pressure is correct and have the balancing checked.

Under-inflation detection

These wheels have tyre pressure sensors. Repairs must be carried out by a CITROËN dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.

Security bolts (according to version)

Each wheel is equipped with one security bolt.

To remove it:

) Remove the protector using tool 3 .

) Use the security socket with the wheelbrace.

If your vehicle is fi tted with a spare wheel of a different size to those on the vehicle, you must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) whilst using the spare wheel.

The wheel bolts are speci fi c to the type of wheel.

If the type of wheel is changed, check with your CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop that the wheel bolts are compatible with the new wheels.

Take care to note down the code number engraved on the head of the security bolt socket. This will enable you to obtain a replacement security bolt socket from your dealer.

182

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

CHANGING A BULB Front lamps

Model with Xenon headlamps

(D1S)

The headlamps are fi tted with polycarbonate glass with a protective coating:

) do not clean them using a dry or abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent or solvent product,

) use a sponge and soapy water,

) when using a high pressure washer on persistent marks, do not keep the lance directed towards the lamps or their edges for too long, so as not to damage their protective coating and seals.

Risk of electrocution

Xenon bulbs must be replaced by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

You are advised to change both

D1S bulbs at the same time, if one of them has failed.

) Do not touch the bulb directly with your fi ngers, use lint-free cloths.

Changing a bulb should only be done after the headlamp has been switched off for a few minutes (risk of serious burns).

It is imperative to use only antiultraviolet (UV) type bulbs in order not to damage the headlamp.

Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb with the same type and speci fi cation.

Dual-function Xenon headlamps (dipped/main): D1S

Cornering lighting: HP19

Daytime running lamps/ sidelamps (LEDs)

For the maintenance of the front lamps and changing HP19 and

D1S bulbs and LED lamps, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

183

184

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Main beam headlamps Sidelamps

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Model with halogen headlamps

Main beams: H1

Dipped beams: H7

Directional lighting: H7

Daytime running lamps/ sidelamps (LEDs)

For the maintenance of the front lamps and changing LED lamps, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

) Remove the protective cap A .

) Disengage the retaining spring.

) Remove the bulb and replace it, paying attention to the direction of fi tting.

) Re fi t the retaining spring.

) Re fi t the protective cap A .

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Directional lamp Sidelamps

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Dipped beam headlamps

) Remove the protective cap B .

) Disconnect the connector by pressing it between the thumb and index fi nger.

) Free the bulb from its two metal clamps.

) Take out the bulb.

) Replace the bulb, exerting a slight axial force.

) Re fi t the connector, until it is all the way in.

) Re fi t the protective cap B .

) Remove the protective cap C .

) Disconnect the connector by pressing it between the thumb and index fi nger.

) Free the bulb from its two metal clamps.

) Take out the bulb.

) Replace the bulb, exerting a slight axial force.

) Re fi t the connector, until it is all the way in.

) Re fi t the protective cap C .

185

Direction indicators

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Front foglamps

) Remove the fi xing screw of cover A using a torx tool, tip the cover over and remove.

) Remove the xing screw of lamp B using a torx tool and pull the headlamp unit to remove it from the bumper.

) Detach the bulb by pressing on bars 1 and 2 .

) Disconnect the connector (pull whilst pressing on the grey tongue using a fl at screwdriver).

) Replace the bulb.

) Re fi t the connector (push the grey tongue in well).

) Re fi t the headlamp unit in the bumper.

) Re fi t the lamp screws.

) Position the cover using its guides and re fi t the screws.

Bulbs: HP24W

) Remove the fi xing screw of cover using a torx tool, tip the cover over and remove.

) Remove the xing screw of lamp B using a torx tool and pull the headlamp unit to remove it from the bumper.

) Disconnect the connector D .

) Remove the bulb by performing a quarter of a turn.

) Replace the bulb.

) Re fi t the connector D .

) Re fi t the headlamp unit in the bumper.

) Re fi t the lamp screws.

) Position the cover using its guides and re fi t the screws.

Bulbs: H8

186

Side repeaters

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Rear lamps (Saloon)

Boot-mounted lamps

The side repeater is sealed.

If the bulb is faulty, replace the side repeater.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Identify the failed bulb.

Brake lamps and sidelamps:

P 21 W/5 W

Sidelamps: R 5 W

Reversing lamp: H 21 W

Foglamps: H 21 W

Direction indicators: PY 21 W

When re fi trap the electrical cables.

) Open the boot.

) Using a fl at screwdriver, remove the 3 clips which fi x the trim in the lamp area.

) Partially remove the trim F .

) Disconnect the connector G .

) Unclip the bulb holder H .

) Replace the bulb.

) Re fi t the bulb holder H .

) Check that the bulb holder H is secured correctly by the two clips 6 .

) Re fi t the connector G .

) Replace and x the trim F with its clips.

187

Wing-mounted lamps

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

) Remove the lateral boot trim fl ap A . To do so, pull it towards the inside of the boot, then pull it upwards.

) Disconnect connector B .

) Unscrew the 2 fi xings C .

) Remove the lamp from its housing.

) Detach the bulb holder D .

) Replace the bulb.

) Re fi t the bulb holder D .

) Place the lamp in its housing.

) Screw in the 2 fi xings C .

) Re fi t connector B .

) Re fi t the trim A .

You can use the wheelbrace to screw or unscrew the fi xings C .

188

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Rear lamps (Tourer)

Boot-mounted lamps

Identify the failed bulb.

Brake lamps and sidelamps:

P 21 W/5 W

Sidelamps: R 5 W

Reversing lamp: H 21 W

Foglamps: H 21 W

Direction indicators: PY 21 W

) Open the boot.

) Using a fl at screwdriver, remove the plastic cover F .

) Disconnect the connector G .

) Unscrew the xing nut H .

) Disengage the lamp from its housing.

) Unclip the bulb holder J .

) Replace the bulb.

) Re fi t the bulb holder ensuring that it is correctly clipped in place.

) Position the lamp in its housing.

) Tighten the fi xing nut H .

) Re fi t the connector G .

) Position and clip in place the plastic cover F .

You can use the wheelbrace to screw or unscrew the fi xing nut H .

189

Wing-mounted lamps

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Remove the lateral boot trim A .

To do so:

) Pull it towards towards the inside of the boot.

) Pull it upwards.

) Disconnect the connector B .

) Unscrew the xing nut C .

) Remove the lamp from its housing.

) Detach the bulb holder D .

) Replace the faulty bulb.

) Re fi t the bulb holder D .

) Place the lamp in its housing.

) Screw in the fi xing nut C .

) Re fi t the connector B .

) Re fi t the trim A .

You can use the wheelbrace to screw or unscrew the fi xing nut C .

190

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Number plate lamps (W5W) Third brake lamp (LEDs)

) Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the external holes of the lens.

) Push it outwards to unclip it.

) Remove the lens.

) Change the faulty bulb.

For the replacement of this type of LED lamp, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

191

Interior lamps

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Boot lamp Floor lighting

Roof lamps

) Unclip the transparent cover of the roof lamp to reach the bulb.

Bulb: W 5W

Map reading lamp

) Detach the cover.

) If necessary, detach the partition of the affected map reading lamp.

Rear reading lamps (Tourer)

) Detach the cover and use a W 5W bulb.

Pavement lighting

) Detach the cover and use a W 5W bulb.

Glovebox

192

) Detach the cover of the reading lamp to access the bulb.

Bulb: W 5W

) Detach the cover and use a W 5W bulb.

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

CHANGING A FUSE

Operating procedure for replacing a failed fuse with a new fuse to rectify a failure of the corresponding function.

The 2 fuseboxes are located below the dashboard and under the bonnet.

Replacing a fuse

Before replacing a fuse, you should ascertain the cause of the fault and have it remedied. The numbers of the fuses are indicated on the fusebox.

Replace the fuse that has failed with one of the same rating (same colour).

Use the special tweezer placed on the fl ap close to the fuseboxes.

Fuses under the dashboard

Access to the fuses

) fully open the storage box then pull fi rmly on it horizontally,

) remove the trim by pulling sharply on the bottom.

Fusebox A

When re fi tting the storage box, observe the following advice:

- With the storage box horizontal, re fi t the bottom ensuring that the lower cut-outs are in line with the pins.

- Give a sharp push to the front.

- Close the storage box, ensuring that the springs located behind pass over the top.

Good Failed

Tweezer 1

Fusebox C Fusebox B

193

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

FUSEBOX A

Fuse N°

G29

G30

G31

G32

G33

G34

G35

G36

G37

G38

G39

G40

Rating

5 A

20 A

5 A

30 A

20 A

30 A

3 A

Table of fuses

Function

Not used

Heated door mirrors

Rain and sunshine sensor

Seat belt not fastened warning lamps

Electrochromatic mirrors

Sunroof (saloon)

Passenger door lighting - passenger door mirror adjustment

Electric tailgate (Tourer)

Heated front seats

Driver’s electric seat

Passenger’s electric seat - HiFi ampli fi er

Trailer relay unit supply

FUSEBOX B

Fuse N°

G36

G37

G38

G39

G40

Rating

15 A

5 A

10 A

3 A

10 A

3 A

194

Function

6 speed automatic gearbox

4 speed automatic gearbox

Daytime running lamps - Diagnostic socket

ESP

Hydraulic suspension

STOP switch

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

FUSEBOX C

Fuse N°

Rating

15 A

30 A

5 A

10 A

30 A

5 A

F10

F11

F12

20 A

30 A

15 A

F13 5 A

Function

Rear screen wipe (Tourer)

Locking and deadlocking relay

Airbags

Automatic gearbox - additional heater unit (Diesel) - electrochromatic rear view mirrors

Front window - sun roof - passenger door lighting - passenger door mirror adjustment

Rear window

Vanity mirror lighting - Glove box lighting - interior lamps - torch (Tourer)

Radio - CD changer - Steering mounted controls - Screen - De fl ation detection -

Electric boot ECU

Cigarette lighter - front 12 V socket

Alarm - Steering mounted controls, lighting, signalling and wiper stalks

Low current anti-theft switch

Driver’s electric seat - instrument panel - seat belt not fastened warning lamps air conditioning controls

Engine relay unit - Hydraulic suspension pump cut-off relay - airbag ECU supply

F14

F15

F17

FSH

15 A

Rain and sunshine sensor - parking sensors- passenger’s electric seat - trailer relay unit -

HIFI ampli fi er ECU - Bluetooth system - Lane Departure Warning System

30 A

40 A

Locking and deadlocking relay

Heated rear screen - heated door mirrors

SHUNT PARK SHUNT

195

Fuses under the bonnet

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Access to the fuses

) Undo each screw by a 1/4 turn.

) Change the fuse.

After a repair, take care to close the cover correctly.

Any repairs on the MAXI fuses

(that give additional protection) located in the fuseboxes, must be left to a CITROËN or a qualifi

196

Table of fuses

Fuse N°

Rating

20 A

15 A

10 A

15 A

10 A

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

F21

F10

F11

F12

40 A

30 A

10 A

15 A

10 A

5 A

10 A

25 A

10 A

30 A

40 A

30 A

Engine control unit

Horn

Screen wash pump

Function

Headlamp wash pump

Engine actuators

Air fl ow meter - Directional headlamps - Diagnostic socket

Automatic gearbox lever lock - Power steering

Starter motor

Clutch switch - STOP switch

Engine actuators

Air conditioning blower

Wipers

BSI supply (ignition on)

Right-hand main beam

Left-hand main beam

Right-hand dipped beam

Left-hand dipped beam

Engine actuators

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Table of fuses

Fuse N°

Rating

25 A

15 A

20 A

30 A

Function

Rear 12 V socket (max power: 100 W)

Foglamps

Additional burner (Diesel)

Electric parking brake

On completion, close the cover carefully.

If the cover is not correctly positioned or not properly closed, this could cause serious problems on your vehicle. For the same reason, take care not to spill any liquid in the fusebox.

Your vehicle’s electrical system is designed to operate with either standard or optional equipment.

Before installing electrical equipment or accessories on your vehicle, consult a dealer CITROËN or a quali fi ed workshop.

CITROËN declines all responsibility for the consequences and costs that are caused by faults or repairs on your vehicle resulting from the installation of accessories that are not supplied and/or not recommended by CITROËN and not installed in conformity with its requirements, particularly when the total consumption of additional devices exceeds 10 milliamperes.

The Maxi fuses give additional protection to electrical systems. any work on them must be carried out by a dealer CITROËN or a qualifi ed workshop.

197

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Access to the battery

V6 HDi engine

BATTERY

Procedure for charging your battery when it is fl at or for starting the engine using another battery.

The presence of this label, in particular with the Stop & Start system, indicates the use of a

12 V lead-acid battery with special technology and speci fi cation; the involvement of a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop is essential when replacing or disconnecting the battery.

Failure to observe this recommendation may cause premature wear of the battery.

The battery is located under the bonnet.

For access to it:

) open the bonnet using the interior release lever, then the exterior safety catch,

) secure the bonnet stay,

) remove the plastic cover to gain access to the two terminals,

) unclip the fusebox to remove the battery, if necessary.

The battery is located in the boot under the left-hand wing trim.

For access to it:

) open the boot,

) open the fl ap and remove the battery.

XI After re fi tting the battery, the Stop &

Start system will only be active after a continuous period of immobilisation of the vehicle, a period which depends on the climatic conditions and the state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 hours).

198

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Starting using another battery

) Lift the pins to remove the front left headlamp cover (V6 HDi engine).

) Connect the red cable to the positive terminal (+) of the fl at battery A , then to the positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B .

) Connect one end of the green or black cable to the negative terminal (-) of the slave battery B .

V6 HDi engine: the positive terminal (-) is located under the red cover.

) Connect the other end of the green or black cable to the earth point on the broken down vehicle.

) Operate the starter, let the engine run.

) Wait until the engine returns to idle and disconnect the cables.

Charging the battery using a battery charger

The Stop & Start battery does not have to be disconnected for charging.

) Disconnect the battery from the vehicle.

) Follow the instructions for use provided by the manufacturer of the charger.

) Reconnect starting with the negative terminal (-).

) Check that the terminals and connectors are clean. If they are covered with sulphate (whitish or greenish deposit), remove them and clean them.

The batteries contain harmful substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of in accordance with regulations and must not, in any circumstances, be discarded with household waste.

Take used remote control batteries and vehicle batteries to an authorised collection point.

It is advisable to disconnect the battery if the vehicle is to be left unused for more than one month.

Do not disconnect the terminals while the engine is running.

Do not charge the batteries without disconnecting the terminals fi rst.

Do not touch the clips during the operation.

Do not lean over the batteries.

Disconnect the cables in the reverse order to connection, ensuring that they do not touch.

Before disconnecting the battery

Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition before disconnecting the battery.

Close the windows and the doors before disconnecting the battery.

Following reconnection of the battery

Following reconnection of the battery, switch on the ignition and wait

1 minute before starting to permit initialisation of the electronic systems. However, if slight malfunctions remain following this operation, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Referring to the corresponding section, you must yourself reinitialise:

- the remote control key,

- the glass panoramic roof blind,

- the GPS satellite navigation system.

199

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

ENERGY ECONOMY MODE

System which manages the duration of use of certain functions to conserve a suf fi cient level of charge in the battery.

After the engine has stopped, you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics system, windscreen wipers, dipped headlamps, courtesy lights, etc. for a maximum combined duration of thirty minutes.

Switching to economy mode

Once the thirty minutes are over, a message appears on the multi-function screen indicating that the vehicle has switched to economy mode and the active functions are put on standby.

If the telephone is being used at this time:

- it will be maintained for 5 minutes with radio-CD hands-free kit,

- it will be interrupted after 10 minutes with the MyWay audio-navigation system,

- you can complete your call with the NaviDrive system.

This period may be signi fi cantly reduced if the battery charge is low.

Exiting economy mode

These functions are reactivated automatically next time the vehicle is driven.

) In order to resume the use of these functions immediately, start the engine and let it run for a few minutes.

The time available will then be double the duration for which the engine was left running. However, this time will always be between fi ve and

thirty minutes.

TOWING THE VEHICLE

Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye.

Access to the tools

A fl at battery prevents the engine from starting (refer to the corresponding paragraph).

The towing eye is installed in the jack box placed in the spare wheel.

For access to it:

) open the boot,

) raise the oor,

) remove the towing eye from the jack box.

200

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Towing your vehicle Towing another vehicle

Failure to observe this special condition could result in damage to certain braking components and the absence of braking assistance the next time the engine is started.

In the event of a fault or malfunction with the electronic gearbox system, the vehicle may be immobilised with a gear engaged. In this case the front of the vehicle must be lifted for towing.

) On the front bumper, unclip the cover by pressing at the top.

) Screw the towing eye in fully.

) Attach the towing bar.

) Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the towed vehicle.

) Place the gear lever in neutral

N on the automatic gearbox).

) On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by pressing:

- on the right (Saloon),

- at the bottom (Tourer).

) Screw the towing eye in fully.

) Attach the towing bar.

) Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the towed vehicle.

When towing with all four wheels on the ground, always use a towing bar.

When towing with only two wheels on the ground, always use professional lifting equipment.

When towing with the engine off, there is no longer any braking or steering assistance.

201

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

TOWING A TRAILER,

A CARAVAN, ETC.

Towbar suitable for the attachment of a trailer or caravan with additional lighting and signalling.

Driving advice

Distribution of loads

) Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heaviest items are as close as possible to the axle and the nose weight approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it.

Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing engine performance.

Above 1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of altitude.

Refer to the "Technical Data" section for details of the weights and towed loads which apply to your vehicle.

Your vehicle is primarily designed for transporting people and luggage, but it may also be used for towing a trailer.

We recommend the use of genuine

CITROËN towbars and their harnesses that have been tested and approved from the design stage of your vehicle, and that the fi tting of the towbar is entrusted to a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

If the towbar is not fi tted by a

CITROËN dealer, it is imperative that it is fi tted in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer's instructions.

Driving with a trailer places greater demands on the towing vehicle and the driver must take particular care.

202

Side wind

) Take into account the increased sensitivity to side wind.

Cooling

Towing a trailer on a slope increases the temperature of the coolant.

As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.

) To lower the engine speed, reduce your speed.

The maximum towed load on a long incline depends on the gradient and the ambient temperature.

In all cases, keep a check on the coolant temperature.

) If the warning lamp and the warning lamp come on, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as possible.

Braking

Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.

To avoid overheating of the brakes on a long mountain type of descent, the use of engine braking is recommended.

Tyres

) Check the tyre pressures of the towing vehicle and of the trailer, observing the recommended pressures.

Lighting

) Check the electrical lighting and signalling on the trailer.

The rear parking sensors will be deactivated automatically if a genuine CITROËN towbar is used.

Blanking cover

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

ROOF BARS

The design of your vehicle requires the use of roof bars that are tested and approved by CITROËN, for your safety and to avoid damage to the roof and tailgate.

Regardless of the type of loading equipment to be transported on the roof (bicycle carrier, ski carrier…), it is imperative that you add transverse roof bars. Any securing or lashing to components other than the roof bars is strictly prohibited.

Maximum load that can be distributed on the roof bars

(for a loading height not exceeding 40 cm; except bicycle carrier): 80 kg.

If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt your speed to the pro fi le of the road to avoid damaging the roof bars and the fi xings on the roof.

Please refer to national legislation in order to comply with the regulations concerning the transportation of objects which are longer than the vehicle.

When towing, you must remove the blanking cover in the front bumper as well as the bonnet seal if fi tted

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop for this.

Recommendations

) Distribute your load evenly, avoiding overloading on one side.

) Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close as possible to the roof.

) Anchor the load securely and draw attention to it if any part of it is overhanging.

) Drive gently, as the vehicle will be more liable to the effects of side winds (vehicle stability may be altered).

) Remove the roof bars as soon as they are no longer needed.

203

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

VERY COLD PROTECTION *

Adjustable device which prevents the intake of snow particles, which could obstruct the air fi lter.

HDi Diesel 160 PEF engine

Normal position

The fl ap 2 is in a horizontal position in the air duct 3 .

Snow position

) Push and rotate the knob by

90 ° in the direction of the arrow in order to position the fl ap 2 in a vertical position in the air duct 3 .

To return to the normal position, push the knob then rotate in the opposite direction.

V6 HDi Diesel 240 PEF engine

Snow position

Slide the de fl ector 1 into the air duct 2 and clip in.

It is essential to remove the very cold protection:

- When the ambient temperature exceeds 10 °C.

- When driving at speeds of over

75 mph (approximately 120 km/h).

204

* According to country.

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

COLD CLIMATE SCREEN *

Removeable screen which prevents the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan.

Fitting

) Offer up the 2 sections of the snow guard to the upper and lower sections of the front bumper.

) Press on the surround to clip in one by one the fi xing clips.

Remove

) Using a screwdriver, lift it up to detach each fi xing clip one by one.

Before fi tting After fi tting

It is essential to remove the snow guard:

- When the ambient temperature exceeds 10 °C,

- When driving at speeds of over

75 mph (approximately 120 km/h).

* According to country.

205

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Matt paint

If you vehicle is fi nished with a clear matt lacquer, please observe the following recommendations to avoid damaging the paintwork by the use of an inappropriate procedures.

These recommendations are also valid for alloy road wheels fi nished with clear matt lacquer.

Never clean the vehicle without water.

Never wash your vehicle in an automatic roller brush car wash.

Never polish the vehicle body, nor the alloy wheels. Doing this will make the paintwork shiny.

Do not use paint cleaners, abrasive products or paint polishing or preserving products (such as wax, for example) on the paintwork. These products are only suitable for bright fi nishes. Application of these products on vehicles with a matt fi nish will seriously damage the paint surface of the vehicle, giving rise to irreversible shiny or stained areas.

Never use a high pressure jet wash with a lance fi tted with a brush, this may scratch the paintwork.

Never select a wash programme that fi nishes with a hot wax cycle.

We recommend the use of a high pressure jet wash, or at least a water hose with a high output.

We recommend that the vehicle be rinsed using de-ionised water.

Use only a micro fi bre cloth to dry the vehicle. It must be clean and used without heavy pressure.

Lightly wipe off any fuel stains present on the lacquer using a soft cloth, then leave to dry.

From the range of cleaning and maintenance products recommended and approved by CITROËN, use only products for removing insects and car shampoo.

Always have paint repairs done by a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

206

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

ACCESSORIES

A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the

CITROËN dealer network.

These accessories and parts have been tested and approved for reliability and safety.

They are all adapted to your vehicle and bene fi t from CITROËN's recommendation and warranty.

"Comfort":

front and rear parking sensors, isotherm module, reading lamp, sun blinds…

"Security and safety":

anti-intrusion alarm, warning triangle and high visibility vest, breathalyzer, fi rst aid kit, snow chains, non-skid covers, security wheel bolts, vehicle tracking system, child seats, fi re extinguisher, caravan mirror…

"Transport solutions":

boot liner, boot carpet, towbars, towbar wiring harness, transverse roof bars, bicycle carrier, ski carrier, roof boxes, boot dividers, boot net… "Protection":

mats * , seat covers, mud fl aps, bumper protectors, vehicle covers, door sill protectors…

"Style":

alloy wheels, rear spoiler, chromed mirror shells…

* To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:

- ensure that the mat is positioned and secured correctly,

- never fi t one mat on top of another.

207

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

"Multimedia":

WIFI on board, 230 V socket, audio systems, speakers, portable navigation systems, hands-free kit, DVD player, USB Box, mapping update

CD, speed camera detectors, Hi-Fi module…

Installation of radio communication transmitters

Before installing any after-market radio communication transmitter, you can contact a CITROËN dealer for the speci fi cation of transmitters which can be fi tted (frequency, maximum power, aerial position, speci fi c installation requirements), in line with the

Vehicle Electromagnetic Compatibility

Directive (2004/104/EC).

Depending on the legislation in force in the country, it may be compulsory to have a high visibility safety vest, warning triangle and spare bulbs and fuses available in the vehicle.

The fi tting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by

CITROËN may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system and excessive electrical consumption.

Please note this precaution. You are advised to contact a CITROËN representative to be shown the range of recommended equipment and accessories.

208

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

MODELS:

Model codes:

RD... RW...

PETROL ENGINES

5FS-8/P

Cubic capacity (cc)

Bore x stroke (mm)

EU standard maximum power (kW)/hp DIN

1.6 litre VTi 120

1 598

77 x 85.8

88/120

Maximum power engine speed (rpm)

EU standard maximum torque (Nm)

Maximum torque engine speed (rpm)

6 000

160

4 250

ENGINES AND GEARBOXES

5FV-5FN/A 5FV-5FN/8

1.6 litre THP 155

1 598

77 x 85.8

115 * /159

6 000

240

1 400

Catalytic converter

GEARBOXES

Yes

Electronic gearbox system

(6-speed)

Automatic

(6-speed)

Yes

Manual

(6-speed)

OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)

Engine (with fi lter replacement) 4.25 4.25 4.25

* In Russia, the maximum power is 110 kW and in Brazil, the maximum power is 120 kW.

RFJF

2 litre 16V

1 997

85 x 88

103/143

6 000

200

4 000

Unleaded

Yes

Automatic

(4-speed)

XII

209

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

Petrol engines

Gearboxes

Model codes:

RD...

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (SALOON) in kg

1.6 litre VTi 120

Electronic gearbox system

5FS-8/P

1.6 litre THP 155

Automatic

5FV-5FN / A

Manual

5FV-5FN/8

1 425

1 500

2 018

1 515

1 590

2 026

1 471

1 546

2 065

2 litre 16V

Automatic

RFJF

1 583

1 658

2 090

- Gross train weight (GTW)

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10 % or 12 % gradient trailer within GTW limit)

3 318

1 300

1 570

3 526

1 500

1 710

3 565

1 500

1 730

3 590

1 500

1 720

XII

210

750 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 64 69 70 69

* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.

The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).

High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

Petrol engines

Gearboxes

Model codes:

RW...

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (TOURER) in kg

1.6 litre VTi 120

Electronic gearbox system

5FS-8/P

1 498

1 573

1.6 litre THP 155

Automatic

5FV-5FN

1 534

1 609

/ A

Manual

5FV-5FN/8

1 503

1 578

2 133 2 200 2 167

2 litre 16V

Automatic

RFJF

1 619

1 694

2 224

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 433 3 700 3 667 3 724

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10 % or 12 % gradient trailer within GTW limit)

1 300

1 600

1 500

1 790

1 500

1 790

1 500

1 800

- Recommended nose weight

750

The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.

The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).

High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.

XII

211

MODELS:

Model codes:

RD... RW...

DIESEL ENGINES

Cubic capacity (cc)

Bore x stroke (mm)

EU standard maximum power (kW)/hp DIN

Maximum power engine speed (rpm)

EU standard maximum torque (Nm)

Maximum torque engine speed (rpm)

Catalytic converter

Particle emission fi lter (PEF)

GEARBOXES

XII

OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)

Engine (with fi lter replacement)

* In Belgium, the maximum power is 100 kW.

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

9HL/8

HDi 110

ENGINES AND GEARBOXES

9HR / 8 RHR-RHF/H-8 e-HDi 110

1 560

75 x 88.3

82/112

3 500

280

1 750

HDi 140

1 997

85 x 88

103 * /140

4 000

320

2 000

Manual

(5-speed)

Yes

Electronic gearbox system

(6-speed)

Yes

Manual

(6-speed)

3.75 5.25

212

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

MODELS:

Model codes :

RD... RW...

DIESEL ENGINES

Cubic capacity (cc)

Bore x stroke (mm)

EU standard maximum power (kW)/ hp DIN

Maximum power engine speed (rpm)

EU standard maximum torque (Nm)

Maximum torque engine speed (rpm)

ENGINES AND GEARBOXES

RHH-RHE -RHD/8 RHH-RHE-RHD/A 4HL/A

HDi 160

1 997

85 x 88

3 750

340

2 000

120 * /163

HDI 200

2 179

85 x 96

147/206

3 500

420

2 000

Catalytic converter

Particle emissions fi lter (PEF)

GEARBOXES

Manual

(6-speed)

OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)

Engine (with fl ter replacement)

* In Russia, the maximum power is 100 kW.

Yes

5.5

Automatic

(6-speed)

Yes

Automatic

(6-speed)

5.25

X8Z/A

V6 HDi 240

2 993

84 x 90

177/240

3 800

450

1 600

Diesel

Yes

Automatic

(6-speed)

6.25

XII

213

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

XII

Diesel engines

Gearboxes

Model codes:

RD...

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

- Gross train weight (GTW)

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (SALOON) in kg

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10 % or 12 % gradient

- Braked limit)

HDi 110

Manual

9HL/8

1 506

1 581

2 041

3 141

1 100

1 340

750

55 e-HDi 110

Electronic gearbox system

9HR/8

1 525

1 600

2 062

3 162

1 100

1 340

750

HDi 140

Manual

RHR-RHF/H-8

1 608

1 683

2 155

3 755

1 600

1 820

750

73 - Recommended nose weight

* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.

The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx.) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).

High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.

214

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

Diesel engines

Gearboxes

Model codes :

RD...

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

- Gross train weight (GTW)

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient

- Braked limit)

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (SALOON) in kg

HDi 160 HDi 200

Automatic Manual

RHH-RHE -

RHD/8

1 563

1 638

Automatic

RHH-RHE-

RHD/A

1 609

1 684

4HL/A

1 731

1 806

2 156

3 656

2 190

3 290

2 231

3 831

1 500

1 740

1 100

1 390

1 600

1 820

- Recommended nose weight 70

750

V6 HDi 240

Automatic

X8Z/A

1 766

1 841

2 276

3 676

1 400

1 650

750

The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.

The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx.) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).

High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.

XII

215

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

XII

Diesel engines

Gearboxes

Model codes:

RW...

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (TOURER) in kg

HDi 110

Manual

9HL / 8 e-HDi 110

9HR / 8

Electronic gearbox system

HDi 140

Manual

RHR-RHF/H-8

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

- Gross train weight (GTW)

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient

- Braked limit)

1 538

1 613

2 153

3 153

1 000

1 300

750

1 540

1 615

2 174

3 174

1 000

1 300

750

1 655

1 730

2 276

3 776

1 500

1 800

750

72 - Recommended nose weight

The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.

The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).

High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.

216

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

Diesel engines

Gearboxes

Model codes:

RW...

- Goss vehicle weight (GVW)

- Gross train weight (GTW)

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10 % or 12 % gradient

- Braked limit)

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (TOURER) en kg

HDi 160 HDI 200

Automatic Manual

RHH-RHE-

RHD/8

1 595

1 670

Automatic

RHH-RHE-

RHD/A

1 642

1 717

4HL/A

1 767

1 842

2 238

3 638

2 286

3 286

2 367

3 967

1 400

1 670

1 000

1 290

1 600

1 890

- Recommended nose weight 67

750

V6 HDi 240

Automatic

X8Z/A

1 763

1 838

2 347

3 647

1 300

1 570

750

The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.

The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).

High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.

XII

217

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

XII

Diesel engines

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS - COMMERCIAL VERSIONS (TOURER) in kg

HDi 110 HDi 140

Gearboxes

Model codes:

RW...

Manual

9HL0 /U

1 486

1 561

Manual

RHF8/U

1 585

1 660

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) ** 2 155 2 247

- Gross train weight (GTW) ***

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient ****

- Braked trailer (with load transfer within GTW limit)

3 155

1 000

3 747

1 500

- Recommended nose weight

750

* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + the driver (75 kg).

** Exceeding the maximum weight on the rear axle when towing involves restricting the maximum speed to 80 km/h (approximately 50 mph) as de fi ned by point 2.7 of the EU Directive.

*** Exceeding the gross vehicle weight when towing involves restricting the maximum speed to 80 km/h (approximately

50 mph) as de fi ned by point 2.7 of the EU Directive.

**** Maximum braked trailer weight within the GTW limit; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.

High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.

218

DIMENSIONS (IN MM)

Exterior (Saloon)

I *

2 815

1 054

910

4 779

1 586

2 096

1 557

1 860

1 451

* Without roof bars.

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

XII

219

XII

220

Interior (Saloon)

1 030

1 115

566

504

1 040

1 705

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

Exterior (Tourer)

I *

2 815

1 054

959

4 829

1 586

2 096

1 557

1 860

1 479

* Without roof bars.

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

XII

221

XII

222

Interior (Tourer)

1 060

1 115

510

851

1 058

1 723

T E C H N I C A L D A T A

IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS

Various visible markings for identi fi cation of the vehicle.

The vehicle identi fi cation number

(VIN) is also indicated on the registration document.

All genuine CITROËN replacement parts are available exclusively within the dealer network.

For your safety and in order to remain within the terms of the warranty, you are advised to use only CITROËN replacement parts.

VIN plate

On the left hand centre door pillar.

EU type approval number.

Vehicle Identi fi cation Number

(VIN).

Gross vehicle weight.

Gross train weight.

Maximum weight on front axle.

Maximum weight on rear axle.

VIN stamped on body

VIN on dashboard

Paint colour code and tyre reference

Tyre pressures

On the driver's side centre pillar.

Observe the tyre pressures indicated by CITROËN.

Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold.

Never de fl ate a warm tyre.

When changing tyres, it is essential to use the sizes recommended for your vehicle.

XII

223

XII

224

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL

225

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL

EMERGENCY CALL ASSISTANCE CALL

In an emergency, press this button for more than

2 seconds. Flashing of the green indicator lamp and a voice message con fi rm that the call has been made to the

CITROËN Emergency team * .

Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green indicator lamp goes off.

The green indicator lamp remains on (without fl ashing) when communication is established. It goes off at the end of communication.

Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request assistance if the vehicle breaks down.

A voice message con fi rms that the call has been made * .

Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request.

The cancellation is con fi rmed by a voice message.

OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM

This call is dealt with by the CITROËN Emergency team which receives locating information from the vehicle and can send a detailed alert to the appropriate emergency services. In countries in which the team is not operational, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, the call is dealt with directly by the emergency services (112) without the vehicle location.

If an impact is detected by the airbag ECU, and independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.

If you bene fi t from the CITROËN eTouch offer, you also have available additional services in your MyCITROEN personal space, via the CITROËN

Internet website www.citroen.co.uk.

* These services are subject to conditions and availability.

Consult a CITROËN dealer.

226

When the ignition is switched on, the green indicator lamp comes on for 3 seconds indicating that the system is operating correctly.

If the orange indicator lamp fl ashes: there is a system fault.

If the orange indicator lamp is on continuously: the backup battery must be replaced.

In either case, contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

If you purchased your vehicle outside the CITROËN dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the con fi guration of these services and, if desired, modi fi ed to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country, con fi guration is possible in the of fi cial national language of your choice.

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL USING

NAVIDRIVE 3D

EMERGENCY CALL ASSISTANCE CALL

Warning - the emergency call and the services are only active if the internal telephone is used with a valid SIM card. With a

Bluetooth telephone and without a SIM card, these services are not operational.

Press this button for access to CITROËN services.

In an emergency, press the SOS button until an audible signal is heard and a "Con fi rmation/Cancellation" screen is displayed (if valid SIM card inserted).

A call is made to the CITROËN Emergency team which receives locating information from the vehicle and can send a detailed alert to the relevant emergency services.

In countries in which the team is not operational, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, the call is sent to the emergency services (112).

If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.

The message "Deteriorated emergency call" associated with fl ashing of the orange indicator lamp indicates a malfunction.

Consult a CITROËN dealer.

Select "Customer call" to request any information about the CITROËN marque.

Customer call

RADIO MEDIA

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select "CITROËN Assistance" to make a breakdown assistance call.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

0 #

CITROËN Assistance

This service is subject to conditions and availability. Consult a

CITROËN dealer. If you have purchased your vehicle outside the

CITROËN dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the con fi guration of these services and, if desired, modi fi ed to suit your wishes.

227

228

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

NAVIDRIVE 3D

MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

GPS EUROPE

The NaviDrive 3D is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer for con fi guration of the system.

For safety reasons, it is imperative that the driver carries out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.

When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the NaviDrive 3D switches off following the activation of the Energy Economy mode.

01 First steps

02 Voice commands and steering mounted controls

03 General operation

04 Navigation - Guidance

05 Traffic information

06 Radio

07 Music media players

08 Using the telephone

09 Configuration

10 Screen menu map p. p.

230

232

p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p.

235

240

249

251

252

257

261

262

Certain functions described in this handbook will become available during the course of the year.

229

01 FIRST STEPS

NaviDrive 3D CONTROL PANEL

RADIO MEDIA

4 8

5 6

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0

PQRS TU

* 0

Short press: clears the last character.

Long press: activates voice recognition.

1. CD

2. RADIO: access to the "Radio" Menu.

Display the list of stations in alphabetical order (FM waveband) or frequency order

(AM waveband).

MEDIA: access to the "Media" Menu (Audio CD,

Jukebox, External Device).

Display the list of tracks. Change of source.

NAV: access to the "Navigation" Menu and display of the last destinations.

ESC: abandon the operation in progress.

Long press: return to the main display.

TRAFFIC: access to the "Traf fi c" Menu (function described in detail in sections 02 and 10).

ADDR BOOK: access to the "Address book" Menu

(function described in detail in section 10).

SETUP: access to the "SETUP" Menu

(con fi guration) (function described in detail in sections 02 and 10).

Long press: GPS coverage.

3. Audio settings (Balance/Fader, Bass/Treble,

Musical Ambience...).

4. Volume adjustment (each source is independent, including message and navigation alert) .

Long press: reinitialisation of the system.

Short press: mute.

5. Automatic search for a radio station on a lower frequency.

Selection of the previous CD or MP3 track.

230

6. Automatic search for a radio station on a higher frequency.

Selection of the next CD or MP3 track.

7. Normal display or black screen.

8. Selection of the successive display on the screen of "MAP"/"NAV" (if navigation is in progress)/"TEL"

(if a conversation is in progress)/"RADIO" or

"MEDIA" currently being played.

9. PICK UP: access to the "Phone" menu.

With Bluetooth connection, accept an incoming call.

10. HANG UP: access to the "Phone" menu.

Hang up the current call or refuse an incoming call, with Bluetooth connection.

11. Entering of numbers or letters on the alpha-numeric keypad, pre-selection of 10 radio frequencies.

12. SD card reader.

01 FIRST STEPS

NaviDrive 3D NAVIGATOR

* 0 #

13. OK: con fi rmation of the highlighted item on the screen.

- 4-direction navigator: press to the left/right.

When the "RADIO" screen is displayed: selection of the previous/next frequency.

When "MEDIA" is displayed: selection of the previous/next track.

When "MAP" or "NAV" is displayed: horizontal movement of the map.

- 4-direction navigator: press up/down.

When "RADIO" is displayed: selection of the previous/next radio station on the list.

When the "MEDIA" screen is displayed: selection of the MP3 directory.

When "MAP" or "NAV" is displayed: vertical movement of the map.

Switch to the next or previous page of a menu.

Movement on the virtual keypad displayed.

14. Rotation of the ring:

When the "RADIO" screen is displayed: selection of the previous/next radio station on the list.

When the "MEDIA" screen is displayed: selection of the previous/next CD or MP3 track.

When "MAP" or "NAV" is displayed: front/rear map zoom.

Movement of the menu selection curser.

231

232

02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

VOICE COMMANDS - VOICE

RECO. INITIATION

Before using the system for the fi rst time, you are advised to listen to, say and practice the tutorial.

SETUP

Press the SETUP button and select the "Language & Speech" function.

Turn the ring and select "Voice control".

Activate voice recognition.

Select "Tutorial".

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

CONTEXT

GENERAL

RADIO

SAY

Help address book

Help voice control

Help media

Help navigation

Help telephone

Help radio

Cancel

Correction

Select station

Station <tts:stationName>

Read out station list

Enter frequency

Select wave band

TA on

TA off

ACTION

Access to the address book help

Access to the voice recognition help

Access to the media management help

Access to the guidance, navigation help

Access to the telephone help

Access to the radio help

To cancel a voice command which is in progress

Request to correct the last voice recognition carried out

Clear

Select a radio station

Select a radio station using its RDS description <tts:station Name> from the

RADIO list

Listen to the list of stations available

Listen to the frequency of the current radio station

Choose the frequency waveband (AM or FM)

Change the frequency waveband to AM

Change the frequency waveband to FM

Activate Traf fi c Info (TA)

Deactivate Traf fi c Info

The phrases to be spoken according to the context are indicated in the tables below.

Speak and NaviDrive 3D acts.

Pressing the end of the lighting control stalk activates voice recognition.

NAVIGATION Destination input

Voice advice off

Voice advice on

Save address

Start guidance

Abort guidance

Navigate entry

POI Search

Command to enter a new destination address

Deactivate the spoken guidance instructions

Activate the spoken guidance instructions

Save an address in the address book

Start guidance (once the address has been entered)

Stop the guidance

Start guidance to an entry in the address book

Start guidance to a point of interest

02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

VOICE COMMANDS - VOICE

RECO. INITIATION

CONTEXT

MEDIA

SAY

Media

Select media

Single slot

Jukebox

USB

External device

SD-Card

Track <1 - 1 000>

Folder <1 - 1 000>

ACTION

Select the MEDIA source

Choose a source

Select the CD player source

Select the Jukebox source

Select the USB player source

Select the audio AUX input source

Select the SD card source

Select a speci fi c track (number between

1 and 1 000) on the active MEDIUM

Select a Folder (number between 1 and

1 000) on the active MEDIUM

TELEPHONE Phone menu

Enter number

Phone book

Dial

Save number

Reject

Open the Telephone Menu

Enter a telephone number to be called

Open the phone book

Make a call

Save a number in the phone book

Accept an incoming call

Reject an incoming call

ADDRESS

BOOK

Address book menu

Call <entry>

Navigate <entry>

Open the address book

Call fi le using its < fi le> description as described in the address book

Start guidance to an address in the address book using its < fi le> description

233

02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

1. Successive presses: "Black

Panel" mode - black screen (night driving).

2. Short press to make a telephone call.

Pick up/Hang up.

Access the telephone menu.

Display the calls list.

Long press to reject an incoming call.

Short press: activate the voice recognition.

Long press: repeat the current navigation instruction.

Successive presses: gives access to the Radio and Media screen depending on the current display.

3. Rotation: provides access to the short-cut menus depending on the display on the screen.

Short press: con fi rm the choice displayed on screen.

Long press: return to the main menu.

4. Short press: abandon the current operation.

Reject an incoming telephone call.

Long press: return to the initial display.

5. Menu: provides access to the main menu.

6. VOL +: volume increase.

7. VOL -: volume decrease.

8. Successive presses: mute/restore sound.

9. Short press: Radio: higher frequency.

Music players: next track.

Long press for fast play.

10. Short press: Radio: lower frequency.

Music players: previous track.

Long press for fast play.

11. Short press: display the list of radio frequencies available or the list of tracks, albums, folders.

Long press: update the list of stations received.

234

LIST

MENU

03 GENERAL OPERATION

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

Press the MODE button several times in succession to gain access to the following displays:

RADIO / MUSIC MEDIA/

VIDEO

TELEPHONE

(If a conversation is in progress)

FULL SCREEN MAP

NAVIGATION

(If guidance is in progress)

SETUP

SETUP: access to the "SETUP" Menu: system language * and voice functions * , voice initialisation (section 09), date and time * , display, unit and system parameters.

* Available according to model.

Long press: access to the GPS coverage and to the demonstration mode.

For maintenance of the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth

(spectacles cloth) is recommended, without any additional product.

TRAFFIC

MEDIA

TRAFFIC: access to the Traf fi c Menu: display of the current traf fi c alerts.

MEDIA:

"DVD-audio" menu

"DVD-Video" menu

For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the

"Screen menu map" section of this handbook.

235

03 GENERAL OPERATION

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

Pressing OK gives access to short-cut menus according to the display on the screen.

236

NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN

PROGRESS):

Abort guidance

Repeat advice

Block road

Unblock

Less

Calculate

Zoom/Scroll

Browse route

Route info

Show destination

Trip info

Route type

Avoid

Satellites

Stopovers

Browse route

Zoom/Scroll

Voice advice

Route options

Route type

Route dynamics

Avoidance criteria

Recalculate

TELEPHONE:

End call

Hold call

Dial

DTMF-Tones

Private mode

Micro off

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:

Play options

Normal order

Random track

Scan

Select media

RADIO:

In FM mode

RDS

Radiotext

Regional prog.

In AM mode

Refresh AM list

03 GENERAL OPERATION

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

FULL SCREEN MAP:

Abort guidance/Resume guidance

Set destination/Add stopover

POIs nearby

Position info

Guidance options

Navigate to

Dial

Save position

Zoom/Scroll

Map Settings

2D Map

2.5D Map

3D Map

North Up

Heading Up

Zoom/Scroll

AUDIO DVD (LONG PRESS):

Stop

Group

Group 1 .2/n

Play options

Normal order/Random track/Scan

Select media

237

238

03 GENERAL OPERATION

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

VIDEO DVD (LONG PRESS):

Play

Stop

DVD menus

DVD menu

DVD top menu

List of titles

List of chapters

DVD Options

Audio

Subtitles

Angle

Examples:

NaviDrive 3D IS:

- the map setting which allows the map to be displayed fl at, in perspective or in 3D.

Flat map

Map in perspective

Map in 3D

- con fi guration of the system by means of voice commands.

239

240

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

SELECTING A DESTINATION

The "NAVIGATION" voice commands are listed in section 02.

During guidance, a long press on the end of the lighting stalk repeats the last guidance instruction.

Select the "Address input" function and press OK to con fi rm. NAV

Press the NAV button.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

0 #

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Address input

The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation

Menu function.

Once the country has been selected, turn the ring and select the town function. Press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press OK to con fi rm.

Navigation Menu

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "Destination input" function and press OK to con fi rm.

Destination input

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the letters of the town one by one con fi rming each time by pressing OK.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

A pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few letters) of the towns in the country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual keypad.

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

It is possible to scroll the map using the 4-direction navigator. It is possible to select its orientation via the short-cut menu of the "Full screen map".

Press OK then select "Map Settings" and con fi rm.

Turn the ring and select OK.

Press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC SETUP

GHI

JKL

MNO

0 #

Then select "Start route guidance" and the press OK to con fi rm.

Start route guidance

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

To speed up the process, the post code can be entered directly after selecting the "Postal code" function.

Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.

Select the route type:

"Fast route", "Short route", or

"Optimized route" and press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street" and "House number" functions.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the road with the colour corresponding to the route chosen and press OK to con fi rm and start guidance.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "Save to address book" function to record the address entered in a directory fi le. Press OK to con fi rm the selection.

The NaviDrive 3D allows more than 4 000 contact records to be saved.

To delete a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last destinations".

A long press on one of the destinations displays a list of actions from which you can select:

Delete entry Delete list

It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose from address book" or "Choose from last destinations", by selecting a junction, a town centre, geographic coordinates, or directly on the "Map".

Choose from address book Choose from last destinations

241

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

SETTING AND NAVIGATING TO MY

"HOME ADDRESS"

To be set as the "Home address", an address must fi rst be entered in the address book, for example from "Destination input"/"Address input" then "Save to address book".

Select your home address and con fi rm.

Then select "Edit entry" and con fi rm.

Edit entry

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0

242

NAV

Press the NAV button twice to display the Navigation Menu.

Navigation Menu

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

0 #

Select "Destination input" and con fi rm.

Then select "Choose from address book" and con fi rm. RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Destination input

Select "Set as Home address" and con fi rm to save.

Set as home address

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

To start navigation towards "Home", press NAV twice to display the

Navigation Menu, select "Destination input" and con fi rm.

Then select "Navigate HOME" and con fi rm to start guidance.

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

ROUTE OPTIONS

When the map is displayed on the screen, you can select "Map Settings" then "2D Map/2.5D Map/3D Map/North Up/Heading Up". The display of buildings in 3D mode depends on the progress in town mapping.

NAV

Press the NAV button.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

0 #

Select the "Route dynamics" function.

This function provides access to the "Traf fi c independent", "Semidynamic" and "Dynamic" options.

Route dynamics

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Navigation Menu

Select the "Route options" function and press OK to con fi rm.

Route options

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "Avoidance criteria" function. This function provides access to the "Avoid" options

(motorways, toll roads, ferries, tunnels).

Avoidance criteria

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "Route type" function and press OK to con fi rm. This function allows you to change the route type.

Route type

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

Turn the ring and select the

"Recalculate" function to take into account the route options selected.

Press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Recalculate

243

244

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

ADDING A STOPOVER

Stopovers can be added to or deleted from the route once the destination has been selected.

NAV

Press the NAV button.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

0 #

Press the NAV button again or select the "Navigation" Menu function and press OK to con fi rm.

"Navigation" Menu

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "Stopovers" function and press OK to con fi rm.

Stopovers

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Enter a new address, for example.

Address input

Once the new address has been entered, select "Start route guidance" and press OK to con fi rm.

Start route guidance

Position the stopover on the list and press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Repeat operations 1 to 7 as many times as necessary then select

"Recalculate" and press OK to con fi rm.

Select the "Add stopover" function

(5 stopovers maximum) and press

OK to con fi rm.

Add stopover

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

To change the stopovers, repeat operations 1 to 3 and select

"Rearrange route" (select a stopover, delete it or move it on the list using the ring to change the order, con fi nish with "Recalculate"). fi rm its new position and

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST

(POI)

The points of interest (POIs) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...).

NAV

Press the NAV button.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "POI in city" function to search for POIs in the city required.

Select the country then enter the name of the city using the virtual keypad.

POI in city

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press OK to con fi rm.

Navigation Menu

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0

Select the "POI search" function and press OK to con fi rm.

POI search

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "POI nearby" function to search for POIs around the vehicle.

POI nearby

Select the "POI near destination" function to search for POIs near the point of arrival of the route.

POI near destination

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0

A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual keypad.

Select the "POI in country" function to search for POIs in the country required.

POI in country

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "POI near route" function to search for POIs near the route. RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

POI near route

245

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

CITROËN SEND-TO-CAR with

REGISTRATION AND ACTIVATION

Find your destinations on Google Maps then let CITROËN guide you.

USE

This service only operates with a SIM card from a French, German or Italian service provider.

The SIM card must be inserted in the support located in the glove box. The system does not operate with the Bluetooth connection.

SIM cards the numbers of which have been the subject of a change of service provider are not compatible with this service.

1 To access the registration site, go to www.citroen.fr then activate the account with the registration con fi rmation email.

246

Activate the service on your NaviDrive 3D in accordance with the operating procedure downloaded from the internet website.

It may take a few minutes for the Google Maps menu to appear.

In order to activate the service, the SIM card used must be that declared on the Internet site during registration.

Once the service has been activated, you can change SIM card or service provider.

1 Search for a POI on http://maps.google.fr. Select it and click on

"send".

Select "vehicle" and "CITROËN" then enter the identi fi er chosen.

Click on "send".

Only the Google Maps results symbolised by a red icon can be sent to the NaviDrive 3D system.

The "Notes" fi eld is not sent.

2 Press this button then select Google Maps and con fi rm by pressing OK.

An automatic call is triggered to a voice mail for receipt of the POI.

Press on "ADDR BOOK" and select "My Addresses" to display the list of POIs received.

You can then start guidance, call the POI or display it on the map.

This service is free, with the exception of the cost of the communication - 2 SMS and 1 call for activation, 1 call for each receipt of a POI (approximately 30 seconds).

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

Service station

This icon appears when several POIs are grouped together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon shows details of the POIs.

LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

Airport Cinema

LPG station

Garage

Railway station

Bus station

Camp site

Theme parks

CITROËN

Motor racing circuit

Covered car park

Car park

Rest area

Hotel

Restaurant

Refreshment area

Picnic area

Cafeteria

Port

Industrial estate

Supermarket

Bank

Vending machine

Tennis court

Swimming pool

Golf course

Winter sports resort

Theatre

Hospital

Pharmacy

Police station

School

Post of fi ce

Museum

Tourist information

Automatic speed camera *

Red light camera *

Risk area *

* According to availability in the country.

247

248

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

UPDATING THE RISK AREAS POIs

(Speed Cameras)

POINTS OF INTEREST AND RISK AREAS

SETTINGS

The detailed procedure for updating Risk Area POIs is available from CITROËN dealers.

SPOKEN INSTRUCTION SETTINGS

When the navigation is displayed in the screen, press OK then select or deselect "Voice advice" to activate or deactivate the spoken guidance instructions.

Use the volume button to adjust the volume.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

The volume of the Risk Areas POIs alert can only be adjusted during this type of alert.

NAV

Press the NAV button.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

0 #

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press OK to con fi rm.

Navigation Menu

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

0 #

Select the "Settings" function and press OK to con fi rm.

Settings

RADIO MEDIA

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "POI categories on Map" function to select the POIs to be displayed on the map by default.

POI categories on Map

Select "Set parameters for risk areas" to gain access to the "Display on map", "Visual alert" and "Sound alert" functions.

Set parameters for risk areas

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION

CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND

DISPLAYING OF THE TMC MESSAGES

The TMC (Traf fi c Message Channel) messages provide information relating to traf fi c and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to the driver audibly and visually on the navigation map.

The guidance system can then suggest an alternative route.

TRAFFIC

Press the TRAFFIC button.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

0 #

4 Select the fi lter of your choice:

Messages on route

All warning messages

Only warnings on route

All messages

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

The list of TMC messages appears under the Traf fi c Menu sorted in order of proximity. Select "Geo. Filter".

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Geo. Filter

Press the TRAFFIC button again or select the Traf fi c Menu function and press OK to con fi rm.

Traf fi c Menu

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

When all of the messages on the route are selected, the addition of a geographic fi lter is recommended (within a radius of 3 miles

(5 km) for example) to reduce the number of messages displayed on the map. The geographic fi lter follows the movement of the vehicle.

Select "Select preferred list" and press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

The fi lters are independent and their results are concealed.

We recommend:

- a fi c,

- a fi lter on the route on motorway journeys.

249

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION

PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS

Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:

Weather reports

Wind

Parking

Traf fi c reports

Fog

Snow/ice

250

2 Red and yellow triangle: traf fi c information, for example:

Modi fi ed signage Narrow carriageway

Slippery surface

Delay

Risk of explosion

Demonstration

No entry

Accident

Roadworks

Road closed

Danger

Traf fi c jam

RECEIVING TA MESSAGES

- the station transmits TA messages.

- the station does not transmit TA messages.

- TA messages are not activated.

The TA (Traf fi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traf fi c report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.

With the current audio source displayed on the screen, press the dial.

RADIO MEDIA

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0

2 The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:

Select Traf fi c Announcements (TA) and press the dial to con fi rm and go to the associated settings.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

06 RADIO

SELECTING A STATION

The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with the reception, including in RDS following mode. This phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the audio equipment.

RDS - REGIONAL MODE

MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

RADIO

Press the RADIO button to display the list of stations received locally sorted in alphabetical order.

Select the station required by turning the ring and press to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

While listening to the radio, press buttons frequency.

and

for the automatic search for a lower or higher

When the current radio station is displayed on the screen, press OK.

RADIO MEDIA

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

0 #

The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides access to the following short-cuts:

RDS

Radiotext

Regional prog.

When the "RADIO" screen is displayed, turn the ring or use the 4-direction navigator to select the previous or next station on the list.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than

2 seconds to store the current station. A bleep con fi rms that it has been stored.

Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the stored radio station.

Select the function required and press OK to con fi rm to gain access to the corresponding settings.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0

RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover

100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

251

252

07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD/

USB PLAYER

INFORMATION AND ADVICE

The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3 and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Media Audio and the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standards which permit the recording of several tens of music fi les on a single disc.

The audio equipment will only play audio fi les with the extension

".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the extension ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.

It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.

No other type of fi le (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

Connecting an IPod:

To play MP3 type fi les, connect the IPod using the USB port

(limited functions).

To play ITunes fi les, connect the IPod using the auxiliary socket

(AUX).

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.

If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly.

It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible

(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.

In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.

In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted to

FAT 32.

It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying problems.

During play, exit the "SD-Card" or "USB" source before removing the SD card or the USB memory stick from its port.

To avoid any risk of theft, remove the SD card or the USB memory stick when you leave your vehicle with the roof open.

07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

SELECTING/PLAYING

CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD/

USB PLAYER

Insert the audio or MP3 CD in the player, the SD card in the card reader or the USB peripheral in the

USB port. Play begins automatically.

RADIO MEDIA

ADDR

BOOK SETUP

1 2

ABC

GHI

JKL

PQRS

TUV

DEF

MNO

WXYZ

0 #

MP3 CDs, SD cards or USB peripherals are the compatible sources.

Press the MEDIA button again or select the "Media" Menu function and press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

"Media" Menu

The list of tracks or MP3/WMA fi les appears under "Media" Menu.

Select the "Select media" function and press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Press this button.

RADIO MEDIA

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select media

When the "MEDIA" screen is displayed, turn the ring up or down to select the previous or next compatible source.

RADIO MEDIA

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0

Select the music source required.

Press OK to con fi rm. Play begins.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

0 #

MEDIA

Press the MEDIA button.

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may depend on the recording programme and/or the parameters used.

We recommend the ISO 9660 recording standard.

253

254

MEDIA

07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

JUKEBOX

COPYING A CD, A USB MEMORY STICK OR AN SD CARD

ONTO THE HARD DISK

When copying is in progress, switching off the ignition will interrupt the process but it will resume directly when the ignition is switched on again.

RADIO MEDIA

ADDR

BOOK SETUP

GHI

ABC

DEF

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

0 #

Insert an audio/MP3 CD, a USB memory stick or an SD card.

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

Select the tracks required then "Rip selection" or select all of the tracks using

"Rip all".

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC SETUP

GHI

JKL

MNO

0 #

Check that the active MEDIA source is that of the medium used

(CD, USB or SD card).

Press the MEDIA button. Press the

MEDIA button again or select Media

Menu and press OK to con fi rm.

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

Select "Jukebox management" then

"Add fi les" and press OK at each step to con fi rm.

Add fi les

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select "Add fi les from MP3-Disc" for example and press OK to validate.

Add fi les from MP3-Disc

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0

Select "[New folder]" to create a new folder or select an existing folder

(created previously).

[New folder]

"Do you want to change the names of the tracks that will be ripped?": select

"Yes" to change them or "No".

Yes No

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

To copy an MP3 CD, then select "Real time ripping", "Fast ripping"/"High quality

(192 kbit/sec)" or "Standard quality

(128 kbit/sec)" then select "Start ripping".

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0

Con fi rm the warning message by pressing "OK" to start the copy.

RADIO MEDIA

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0

07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

JUKEBOX

RENAMING OR DELETING AN ALBUM

Check that the active source is not the Jukebox in order to be able to rename or delete a track/folder.

Activate the playing of a source other than the Jukebox (CD, radio, etc...).

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

MEDIA

Press the MEDIA button.

LISTENING TO THE JUKEBOX

MEDIA

Press the MEDIA button.

Press the MEDIA button again or select Media Menu and press OK to con fi rm.

Select "Jukebox management" and press OK to con fi rm.

Press the MEDIA button again or select Media Menu and press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 # 3

Select "Jukebox management" and press OK to con fi rm.

Jukebox management

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select "Play options" and press OK to con fi rm.

Select "Folders & Files" or "Playlists" then press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select "Modify content" and press

OK con fi rm.

Modify content

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0

Press the ESC button to return to the fi rst fi le level.

Playlists can be created in the Jukebox.

Media Menu> Jukebox management> Create new playlist. Add the tracks required one by one then save the change. The "Playlists" play mode must then be selected.

255

256

07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

VIEWING A VIDEO DVD

Insert the DVD in the player. Play begins automatically.

RADIO MEDIA

ADDR

BOOK SETUP

1 2

ABC

GHI

JKL

PQRS

TUV

DEF

MNO

WXYZ

0 #

USING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE (AUX)

AUDIO/VIDEO/RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

Connect the portable device (MP3 player, camcorder, camera…) to the RCA socket (white and red for audio; red and yellow for video) in the glove box using a JACK/RCA audio cable.

MEDIA

If the DVD does not appear on the screen, press the MODE button to gain access to the "MEDIA" screen which displays the DVD screen.

Press the MEDIA button to gain access to the DVD menu at any time, or to the functions of the Media Menu which adjust the video (brightness/ contrast, image format...).

RADIO MEDIA

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

The 4-direction navigator and the chromed ring allow you to move the DVD selection cursor. Change chapter by pressing the or

button.

MEDIA

Press the MEDIA button then press it again or select the "Media" Menu function and press OK to con fi rm.

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

If the external input is not activated, select "Ext. Device (Aux) management" to activate it.

Select "Select media" then "External device (AV)" and press OK to activate it.

External device

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the AUX music source and press OK to con fi rm. Play begins automatically.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the video source required ("DVD-Video", "External device

(AV)"). Press OK to con fi rm. Play begins.

The display and management of the controls is via the portable device.

08 USING THE TELEPHONE

CHOOSING BETWEEN THE BLUETOOTH

TELEPHONE/INTERNAL TELEPHONE

To activate the Bluetooth telephone or the internal telephone, press PICK

UP TEL.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

Select Phone menu, then "Select phone" then choose between

"Telephone off", "Use Bluetooth phone" or "Use internal phone".

Press OK at each step to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

The system can only be connected to one Bluetooth telephone and one SIM card (Internal telephone) at the same time.

In this case, the phone book is synchronised with the Bluetooth telephone.

257

258

08 USING THE TELEPHONE

CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH

TELEPHONE

* The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the

SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to your telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you have access to. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of services is available from dealers.

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the NaviDrive 3D must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

For a fi rst connection, select

"Search phone" and press OK to con fi rm. Then select the name of the telephone.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

0 #

Search phone

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.

The last telephone connected is reconnected automatically.

Enter the authentication code on the telephone. The code to be entered is displayed on the screen.

RADIO MEDIA

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0

Press the TEL button.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Once the telephone has been connected, the NaviDrive 3D can synchronise the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes * .

If no telephone is connected, the system prompts you to "Connect phone". Select "Yes" and press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0

The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears in the multifunction screen. Select the telephone required then select "Connect phone" for a new connection. Select "Delete pairing" to cancel the connection to the telephone.

To change the telephone connected, press the TEL button, then select

Phone menu, then "Select phone" then "Connect Bluetooth phone" then select the telephone required or

"Search phone".

Press OK at each step to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

08 USING THE TELEPHONE

USING THE INTERNAL TELEPHONE WITH

A SIM CARD

If you have declined to use the internal telephone for personal calls, you can still connect a Bluetooth telephone to receive your calls on the vehicle's audio system.

Extract the holder by pressing the eject button.

1 2

ABC

DEF

Enter the PIN code on the keypad then select OK and con fi rm.

* 0 #

Remember PIN

NAV ESC TRAFFIC SETUP

When entering your PIN code, tick the "Remember PIN" tab to allow use of the telephone without having to enter this code when it is used subsequently.

Install the SIM card in the holder and then insert it in the slot.

To remove the SIM card, repeat step 1.

The system asks "Do you want to switch to the internal phone?", select "Yes" if you wish to use your

SIM card for your personal calls.

Otherwise, only the emergency call and the services will use the SIM card.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

0 #

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the SIM card installation operations must be carried out when stationary.

Once the SIM card has been installed, the system can synchronise the address book and the call list.

This synchronisation may take a few minutes.

259

08 USING THE TELEPHONE

RECEIVING A CALL MAKING A CALL

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.

Press the PICK UP TEL button.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No" to refuse and con fi rm by pressing OK.

Yes No

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle appears under "Phone" menu. You can select a number and press

OK to make the call.

260

The PICK UP TEL button accepts, the HANG UP TEL button refuses the incoming call.

To hang up, press the HANG UP TEL button or press OK and select "End call" then con fi rm by pressing OK.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

0 #

End call

Press the steering mounted TEL button to accept an incoming call or to end a call in progress.

Select the "Phone" menu function and press OK to con fi rm.

"Phone" menu

Select "Dial number", then dial the telephone number using the virtual keypad.

Dial number

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

0 #

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You can select "Dial from address book". The NaviDrive 3D can record up to 4 096 entries.

09 CONFIGURATION

SETTING THE DATE AND TIME

This setting operation must be carried out if the battery has been disconnected.

SETUP

Press the SETUP button.

Principle of GPS synchronisation (GMT):

1. Con fi rm the "Synchronise with GPS" selection, the time is then set to

GMT universal time, the date is also updated.

2. Using the 4-direction navigator, move the cursor to the time fi elds and press OK.

3. You can then use the ring to set the time to the time zone of your choice.

Note that when changing between summer/winter time, the time zone must be changed again manually.

Select the "Date format" function and press OK to con fi rm.

Select the format required using the ring and press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC SETUP

GHI

JKL

MNO

0 #

NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

0 #

Select the "Date & Time" function and press OK to con fi rm.

Date & Time

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "Set date & time" function and press OK to con fi rm.

Set date & time

Make the adjustments using the ring and move on to the next using the

4-direction navigator.

Press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "Time format" function and press OK to con fi rm.

Select the format required using the ring and press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

SETUP

* 0 #

Pressing the SETUP button for more than 2 seconds permits access to:

Description of the unit

GPS coverage

Demo mode

261

10 SCREEN MENU MAP

MAIN FUNCTION

OPTION A

3 option A1

3 option A2

OPTION B...

Within 6 miles (10 km)

Within 30 miles (50 km)

Read out settings

On con fi rmation

Incoming messages

TMC station information

TRAFFIC

"Traffic" Menu

Select preferred list

Messages on route

Only warnings on route

All warning messages

All messages

Geo. Filter

Deactivate PIN

Within 2 miles (3 km)

Within 3 miles (5 km)

262

MEDIA

"Media" Menu

Select media

Audio CD/MP3-Disc / DVD-Audio / DVD-Video

Jukebox (Folders & Files)

SD-Card

USB

External device (audio/AV)

Jukebox management

Add fi les

Create folder

Modify content

Edit playlist

Play options

Folders & Files

Playlists

Memory capacity

Sound settings

Refer to the " Sound settings " menu details of which are shown on the next page.

Video settings

Aspect ratio

Menu language

Display

Brightness

Contrast

Colour

AUX standard

Reset video settings

Ext. Device (Aux) management

Off/Audio/Audio and Video (AV)

RADIO

"Radio" Menu

Waveband

Manual tune

Sound settings

Refer to the " Sound settings " menu below.

"Sound settings" Menu

Balance/Fader

Bass/Treble

Equalizer

Linear

Classic

Jazz

Rock/Pop

Techno

Vocal

Mute rear speakers

Loudness

Speed dependent volume

Reset sound settings

NAV

"Navigation" Menu

Abort guidance/Resume guidance

Destination input

Address input

Country

City

Street

House number

Start route guidance

Postal code

Save to address book

Intersection

City district

Geo position

Map

Navigate HOME

Choose from last destinations

Choose from address book

Stopovers

Add stopover

Address input

Navigate HOME

Choose from address book

Choose from last destinations

Rearrange route

Replace stopover

Delete stopover

263

264

Recalculate

Fast route

Short route

Optimized route

POI search

POI nearby

POI near destination

POI in city

POI in country

POI near route

Route options

Route type

POI near destination

Short route

Optimized route

Subscr. service

Settings

Route dynamics

Traf fi c independent

Semi-dynamic

Dynamic

Avoidance criteria

Avoid motorways

Avoid toll roads

Avoid tunnels

Avoid ferries

Recalculate

ADDR

BOOK

"Address book" Menu

Create new entry

Show memory status

Export address book

Delete all voice entries

Delete all entries

Delete folder "My Addresses"

"Phone" menu

Dial number

Dial from address book

Call lists

Messages

Select phone

Telephone off

Use Bluetooth phone

Use internal phone

Connect Bluetooth phone

Search phone

Disconnect phone

Rename phone

Delete pairing

Delete all pairings

Show details

Settings

Automatic answering system

Select ring tone

Phone/Ring tone volume

Enter mailbox number

Internal phone settings

Automatically accept call

Signal waiting call (?)

Show status

Activate waiting call

Deactivate waiting call

Call forward (?)

Show status

Activate call forward

Deactivate call forward

Suppress own number

Select network

Set network automatically

Set network manually

Search for networks

PIN settings

Change PIN

Activate PIN

Deactivate PIN

Remember PIN

SIM-card memory status

SETUP

"SETUP" Menu

Language & Speech

Menu language

Deutsch

English

Español

Français

Italiano

Nederlands

Polski

Portuguese

Voice control

Voice control active

Tutorial

Basics

Examples

Tips

Speaker adaptation

New speaker adaptation

Delete speaker adaptation

Voice output volume

Date & Time

Set date & time

Date format

Time format

265

266

Display

Brightness

Colour

Steel

blue light (only in day mode)

Orange Ray

Blue Flame

Map colour

Day mode for map

Night mode for map

Auto. Day/Night for map

Units

Temperature

Celsius

Fahrenheit

Metric/Imperial

Miles

System

Factory reset

Software version

Automatic scrolling

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

The table below groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning the NaviDrive 3D.

QUESTION

There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD...).

ANSWER

For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,

Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,

CD...).

SOLUTION

Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,

Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear

Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle position, select the musical ambience "Linear" and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.

The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.

The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio equipment.

- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the right way up.

- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be played if it is too damaged.

- Check the content in the case of a recorded

CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.

- The audio equipment's CD player does not play DVDs.

- Due to inadequate quality, certain recorded

CDs will not be played by the audio system.

The CD player sound is poor.

The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.

The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.

267

QUESTION ANSWER

The stored stations do not function (no sound,

87.5 Mhz is displayed...).

An incorrect waveband is selected.

SOLUTION

Press RADIO, select Radio Menu then

"Waveband" to return to the waveband on which the stations are stored.

The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function

(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).

The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.

The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.

Activate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.

This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a failure of the audio equipment.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park).

Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.

Sound cut-outs of 1 to

2 seconds in radio mode.

During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency permitting better reception of the station.

Deactivate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu if the phenomenon is too frequent and always on the same route.

With the engine off, the system switches off after a few minutes of use.

When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on the battery charge.

The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery charge.

268

QUESTION ANSWER

"TA" is selected.

However, certain traf fi c jams along the route are not indicated in real time.

On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the traf fi c information.

In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the traf fi c information.

SOLUTION

Wait until the traf fi c information is being received correctly (displaying of the traf fi c information symbols on the map).

This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the traf fi c information available.

The time taken to calculate a route sometimes seems longer than usual.

The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD/DVD is being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is being calculated.

Wait until the CD/DVD has been copied or stop the copying before starting the guidance function.

I receive a speed camera alert for a speed camera which is not on my route.

The system announces all speed cameras positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may detect speed cameras located on nearby or parallel roads.

Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the speed camera.

The speed camera audible warning does not work.

The audible warning is not active.

The alert volume is set to minimum.

Activate the audible warning on Navigation Menu,

Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.

Increase the volume of the alert when passing a speed camera.

Does the emergency call function work without a

SIM card?

The altitude is not displayed.

No, as certain national regulations impose the presence of a SIM card in order to make an emergency call.

On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites correctly.

Insert a valid SIM card in the slot.

Wait until the system has started up completely.

Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least

4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then select "GPS coverage").

Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.

This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the conditions of reception of the

GPS signal.

269

QUESTION

The route calculation is not successful.

ANSWER

The exclusion criteria may con fl ict with the current location (exclusion of toll roads on a toll motorway).

SOLUTION

Check the exclusion criteria on the Navigation

Menu ("Route options" - "Avoidance criteria").

There is a long waiting period following the insertion of a CD.

When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.

This phenomenon is normal.

I cannot connect my

Bluetooth telephone.

The volume of the telephone connected in Bluetooth mode is inaudible.

I cannot copy the CD to the Jukebox.

The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the equipment may not be visible.

- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is switched on.

- Check that your telephone is visible.

The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.

The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone.

The system does not play the DVD.

The region protection may not be compatible.

The wrong source is selected.

The CD is copy-protected.

A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones is available from the dealer network.

Increase the volume of the MyWay, to maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.

Insert DVDs which have compatible region protection.

Change the active source to CD.

It is normal that a protected CD cannot be copied.

270

QUESTION

The system does not receive SMS.

ANSWER SOLUTION

The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending of the SMS to the system. Use your SIM card and the internal telephone.

The SIM card used is a twin card. Use the original SIM card to receive the SMS.

I cannot update the risk area POIs.

The voice frequencies

(DTMF) are not active when I am communicating and I press numbers on the keypad.

The Navigation Menu - "Update personal POI" is not displayed.

An error message is displayed at the end of the procedure.

Check that the medium used for the update (SD card or USB memory stick) is inserted correctly.

- Start the procedure again in full.

- Consult a CITROËN dealer if the problem persists.

- Check that the data on the MEDIUM is supplied by an of fi cial partner of CITROËN.

The numeric buttons on the keypad are only active for calls if the display is in telephone mode.

To activate them, press the MODE button until the telephone is displayed on the screen.

An accident area which does not concern me is displayed on the screen.

The accident areas are displayed near a point de fi ned on the map and in relation to a direction of travel.

The alert may be triggered when travelling under a road or near a road which has a speed camera.

271

272

The MyWay is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer for con fi guration of the system.

For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.

When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the MyWay switches off following the activation of the Energy Economy mode.

Certain functions described in this handbook will become available during the year.

MYWAY

MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM FOR EUROPE BY SD CARD

01 First steps

02 Steering mounted controls

03 General operation

04 Navigation - Guidance

05 Traffic information

06 Radio

07 Music media players

08 Bluetooth telephone

09 Configuration

10 Trip computer

11 Screen menu map

Frequently asked questions

290

293

295

296

297

301

274

275

276

279

287 289 p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p.

273

01 FIRST STEPS

MyWay CONTROL PANEL

1. Engine not running

- Short press: on/off.

- Long press: CD pause, mute for the radio.

- Short press: CD pause, mute for the radio.

- Long press: reinitialisation of the system.

2. Volume adjustment (each source is independent, including also navigation messages and alerts).

3. Access to the "Radio" Menu. Display the list of stations.

4. Access to the "Music" Menu. Display the tracks.

3 - 4. Long press: access to the audio settings: front/rear fader and left/right balance, bass/ treble, equaliser, loudness, automatic volume adjustment, initialise the settings.

274

3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10

5. Access to the "SETUP" menu.

Long press: access to the GPS coverage and the demonstration mode.

6. Access to the "Phone" Menu. Display the call list.

7. Access to the "MODE" menu.

Selection of the successive display of:

Radio, Map, NAV (if navigation is in progress),

Telephone (if a conversation is in progress), Trip computer.

Long press: display of a black screen (DARK).

8. Access to the "Navigation" Menu. Display the last destinations.

9. Access to the "Traf fi c" Menu. Display the current traf fi c alerts.

10. ESC: abandon the operation in progress.

11. CD eject.

12. Selection of the previous/next radio station from the list.

Selection of the previous/next MP3 folder.

Selection of the previous/next page of a list.

13. Selection of the previous/next radio station.

Selection of the previous/next CD or MP3 track.

Selection of the previous/next line of a list.

14. Buttons 1 to 6:

Selection of the stored radio station.

Long press: store the current radio station.

15. SD card reader (navigation SD card only).

16. Dial for selection of the screen display and according to the context of the menu.

Short press: contextual menu or con fi rmation.

Long press: contextual menu speci fi c to the list displayed.

02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

1. Successive presses: "Black

Panel" mode - black screen

(night driving).

2. Short press to make a telephone call.

Pick up/Hang up.

Access the telephone menu.

Display the calls list.

Long press to reject an incoming call.

Press: repeat the current navigation instruction.

Successive presses: selection of the type of information present on the screen.

3. Rotation: provides access to the short-cut menus depending on the display on the screen.

Short press: con fi rm the choice displayed on the screen.

Long press: return to the main menu.

4. Short press: abandon the current operation.

Reject an incoming call.

Long press: return to the initial display.

5. Menu: provides access to the main menu.

6. VOL +: volume increase.

7. VOL -: volume decrease.

8. Successive presses: mute/restore sound.

9. Short press: Radio: higher frequency.

Music players: next track.

Long press for fast play.

10. Short press: Radio: lower frequency.

Music players: previous track.

Long press for fast play.

11. Short press: display the list of radio frequencies available or the list of tracks, albums, folders.

Long press: update the list of stations received.

LIST

MENU

275

03 GENERAL OPERATION

276

Press the MODE button several times in succession for access to the following menus:

RADIO / MUSIC MEDIA

PLAYERS

FULL SCREEN MAP

TELEPHONE

(If a conversation is in progress)

NAVIGATION

(If guidance is in progress)

TRIP COMPUTER

SETUP: system language * , date and time * , display, vehicle settings * , unit and system settings,

"Demo mode".

* Available according to model.

TRAFFIC:

TMC information and messages.

For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth

(spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product.

For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the

"Screen menu map" section.

03 GENERAL OPERATION

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

A press on the OK dial gives access to short-cut menus according to the display on the screen.

Zoom/Scroll

Voice advice

Route options

NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN PROGRESS):

Abort guidance

Repeat advice

Block road

Route info

Show destination

T rip info

Route type

Avoid

Satellites

TELEPHONE:

End call

Hold call

Dial

DTMF-tones

Private mode

Micro off

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:

Traf fi c info (TA)

Play options

Normal order

Random track

Repeat folder

Scan

Select music

277

278

RADIO:

In FM mode

Traf fi c info (TA)

RDS

Radiotext

Regional prog.

In AM mode

Refresh AM list

03 GENERAL OPERATION

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

FULL SCREEN MAP:

Abort guidance /Resume guidance

Set destination

POIs nearby

Position info

Map settings

Zoom/Scroll

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

SELECTING A DESTINATION

Insert the SD card in the front panel reader and leave it there to use the

Navigation functions.

The navigation SD card data must not be modi fi ed.

Map data updates are available from CITROËN dealers.

Select the "Address input" function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Press the NAV button.

Address input

The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation

Menu function.

Once the country has been selected, turn the dial and select the town function. Press the dial to con fi rm.

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Navigation Menu

Select the "Destination input" function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Destination input

Select the letters of the town one by one con fi rming each time by pressing the dial.

A pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few letters) of the towns in the country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual keypad.

279

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

Turn the dial and select OK.

Press the dial to con fi rm.

Then select "Start route guidance" and the press the dial to con fi rm.

To speed up the process, the post code can be entered directly after selecting the "Postal code" function.

Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.

Start route guidance

Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street" and "House number" functions.

Select the route type:

"Fast route", "Short route" or "Optimized route" and press the dial to con fi rm.

It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose from address book" or "Choose from last destinations".

Choose from address book Choose from last destinations

Select the "Save to address book" function to record the address entered in a directory fi le. Press the dial to con fi rm the selection.

MyWay allows up to 500 contact fi les to be recorded.

During guidance, pressing the end of the lighting stalk repeats the last guidance instruction.

Map settings

You can zoom in/zoom out on the map using the dial.

It is possible to move the map or select its orientation via the short-cut menu of the FULL SCREEN MAP.

Press MODE until the map is displayed full screen. Press the dial then select "Map settings". Select "2.5D Map" or "2D Map" and in the latter case, select "North Up" or "Heading Up".

280

To clear a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last destinations".

A long press on one of the destinations displays a list of actions from which you can select:

Delete entry

Delete list

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

SETTING AND NAVIGATING TO

MY "HOME ADDRESS"

To be set as the "Home address", an address must fi rst be entered in the address book, for example from "Destination input"/"Address input" then "Save to address book".

Select your home address and con fi rm.

Then select "Edit entry" and con fi rm.

Edit entry

Press the NAV button twice to display the Navigation Menu.

Navigation Menu

Select "Destination input" and con fi rm.

Then select "Choose from address book" and con fi rm.

Destination input

Select "Address book" and con fi rm.

Then select "Search entry (complete address book)" and con fi rm.

Address book

Select "Set as home address" and con fi rm to save.

Set as "Home address"

To start navigation towards "Home address", press NAV twice to display the Navigation Menu, select "Destination input" and con fi rm.

Then select "Navigate HOME" and con fi rm to start guidance.

281

282

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

ROUTE OPTIONS

Press the NAV button.

The route selected by the MyWay system depends directly on the route options.

Changing these options may change the route completely.

Select the "Route dynamics" function.

This function gives access to the

"Traf fi c independent" or "Semidynamic" options.

Route dynamics

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Navigation Menu

Select the "Avoidance criteria" function. This function provides access to the AVOID options

(motorways, toll roads, ferries).

Select the "Route options" function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Route options

Avoidance criteria

Select the "Route type" function and press the dial to con fi rm. This function allows you to change the route type.

Route type

Turn the dial and select the

"Recalculate" function to take into account the route options selected.

Press the dial to con fi rm.

Recalculate

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

ADDING A STOPOVER

Stopovers can be added to the route once the destination has been selected.

Press the NAV button.

Enter a new address, for example.

Address input

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Navigation Menu

Select the "Stopovers" function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Stopovers

Once the new address has been entered, select OK and press the dial to con fi rm.

Select "Recalculate" and press the dial to con fi rm.

Recalculate

Select the "Add stopover" function

(5 stopovers maximum) and press the dial to con fi rm.

Add stopover

The stopover must be completed or deleted in order for the guidance to continue to the next destination. Otherwise, the MyWay will always return you to the previous stopover.

283

284

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST

(POI)

The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...).

Press the NAV button.

6 Select the "POI in city" function to search for POIs in the city required.

Select the country then enter the name of the city using the virtual keypad.

POI in city

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Navigation Menu

Select the "POI search" function and press the dial to con fi rm.

POI search

Select the "POI nearby" function to search for POIs around the vehicle.

POI nearby

Select the "POI near destination" function to search for POIs near the point of arrival of the route.

POI near destination

A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual keypad.

Select the "POI in country" function to search for POIs in the country required.

POI in country

Select the "POI near route" function to search for POIs near the route.

POI near route

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

Service station

This icon appears when several POIs are grouped together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon shows details of the POIs.

LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

Airport Cinema

LPG station

Garage

Railway station

Bus station

Camp site

Theme parks

CITROËN

Motor racing circuit

Covered car park

Car park

Rest area

Hotel

Restaurant

Refreshment area

Picnic area

Cafeteria

Port

Industrial estate

Supermarket

Bank

Vending machine

Tennis court

Swimming pool

Golf course

Winter sports resort

Theatre

Hospital

Pharmacy

Police station

School

Post of fi ce

Museum

Tourist information

Automatic speed camera *

Red light camera *

Risk area *

* According to availability in the country. 285

286

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

NAVIGATION SETTINGS

To activate or deactivate vocal guidance, with guidance active and the map displayed on the screen, press the dial and then select or deselect "Voice advice".

Voice advice

The adjustment of the volume for the Risk Areas POIs is used only during the transmission of an alert.

Press the NAV button.

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Select the "POI categories on Map" function to select the POIs to be displayed on the map by default.

POI categories on Map

Navigation Menu Select "Set parameters for risk areas" for access to the "Display on map", "Visual alert" and "Sound alert" functions.

Select the "Settings" function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Set parameters for risk areas

Settings

Select the "Navi volume" function and turn the dial to set the volume of each voice synthesiser (traf fi c information, alert messages…).

Navi volume

UPDATING THE RISK AREAS POIs

(Speed camera information)

Contact a CITROËN dealer for the procedure to follow to obtain the RISK AREA POIs.

This requires an SDHC (High Capacity) compatible reader.

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION

CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND

DISPLAY OF TMC MESSAGES

TMC (Traf fi c Message Channel) messages contain information on traf fi c and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to the driver in the form of audible announcements and symbols on the navigation map.

The navigation system can then suggest an alternative route to avoid a traf fi c problem.

Press the TRAFFIC button.

Select the "Geo. Filter" function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Geo. Filter

The list of TMC messages appears under the Traf fi c Menu sorted in order of proximity.

Press the TRAFFIC button again or select the Traf fi c Menu function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Traf fi c Menu

Select the fi lter of your choice:

Messages on route

All warning messages

Only warnings on route

All messages

The messages appear on the map and on the list.

To exit, press ESC.

Then select the radius of the fi lter in miles (km) required in accordance with the route, press the dial to con fi rm.

When all of the messages on the route are selected, the addition of a geographical fi lter is recommended

(within a radius of 3 miles (5 km) for example) to reduce the number of messages displayed on the map.

The geographical fi lter follows the movement of the vehicle.

The fi lters are independent and their results are cumulative.

We recommend a fi lter on the route and a fi lter around the vehicle of:

- 2 miles (3 km) or 3 miles (5 km) for a region with heavy traf fi c,

- 6 miles (10 km) for a region with normal traf fi c,

- 30 miles (50 km) for long journeys (motorway).

287

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION

PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS

1 Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:

Weather reports Traf fi c reports

Wind

Parking

Fog

Snow/ice

RECEIVING TA MESSAGES

- the station transmits TA messages.

- the station does not transmit TA messages.

- TA messages are not activated.

With the current audio source displayed on the screen, press the dial.

288

2 Red and yellow triangle: traf fi c information, for example:

Modi fi ed signage

Slippery surface

Delay

Risk of explosion

Demonstration

No entry

Narrow carriageway

Accident

Roadworks

Road closed

Danger

Traf fi c jam

The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:

Select Traf fi c Announcements (TA) and press the dial to con fi rm and go to the associated settings.

06 RADIO

SELECTING A STATION

Press the RADIO button to display the list of stations received locally sorted in alphabetical order.

Select the station required by turning the dial and press to con fi rm.

While listening to the radio, press one of the buttons to select the previous or next station on the list.

A long press of one of the buttons starts the automatic search for a station with a lower or higher frequency.

Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than

2 seconds to store the current station.

Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the stored radio station.

RDS - REGIONAL MODE

When the current radio station is displayed on the screen, press the dial.

The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides access to the following short-cuts:

RDS

Radiotext

Regional prog.

Select the function required and press the dial to con fi rm to gain access to the corresponding settings.

289

07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

CD, MP3/WMA CD

INFORMATION AND ADVICE

The MyWay will only play audio fi les with the extension ".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the extension

".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.

It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.

No other type of fi le (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

290

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.

If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly.

It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible

(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.

In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.

It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any play or display problems.

07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

SELECTING/PLAYING MUSIC

CD, MP3/WMA CD

Press the MUSIC button.

The list of tracks or MP3/WMA fi les appears under Music Menu.

Press the MUSIC button again or select the Music Menu function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Music Menu

Select the "Select music" function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Select music

Select the music source required:

CD, MP3/WMA CD. Press the dial to con fi rm. Play begins.

Press the up or down button to select the next/previous folder.

Press one of the buttons to select a music track.

Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or rewind play.

The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may depend on the recording programme and/or the settings used.

We recommend the ISO 9660 fi le standard.

291

07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

USING THE EXTERNAL INPUT (AUX)

JACK/USB AUDIO CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

Connect the portable device (MP3/

WMA player…) to the auxiliary JACK socket or to the USB port, using a suitable audio cable.

Press the MUSIC button then press it again or select the Music

Menu function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Music Menu

Select the "External device" function and press the dial to activate it.

External device

292

Select the AUX music source and press the dial to con fi rm. Play begins automatically.

The display and management of the controls is via the portable device.

08 BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

CONNECTING A TELEPHONE

* The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you. A list of mobile telephones with the best level of compatibility is available from the dealer network.

For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the MyWay must be carried out with the vehicle stationary. The ignition must be on.

For a fi rst connection, select

"Search phone" and press the dial to con fi rm. Then select the name of the telephone.

Search phone

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.

The last telephone connected is reconnected automatically.

Enter the authentication code on the telephone. The code to be entered is displayed on the screen.

Press the PHONE button.

Once the telephone has been connected, MyWay can synchronise the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes * .

To change the telephone connected, press the PHONE button, then select

Phone Menu and press the dial to con fi rm.

The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears on the multifunction screen. Select the telephone required for a new connection.

2 Select "Connect phone". Select the telephone and press to con fi rm.

Connect phone

293

294

08 BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

RECEIVING A CALL MAKING A CALL

Press the PHONE button.

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display on the multifunction screen.

Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No" to refuse and con fi rm by pressing the dial.

Yes No

To hang up, press the PHONE button or press the dial and select "End call" then con fi rm by pressing the dial.

End call

A short press on the steering mounted TEL button accepts the incoming call or ends the call in progress. A long press rejects the incoming call.

The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle appears under Phone Menu. You can select a number and press the dial to make the call.

2 Select the Phone Menu function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Phone Menu

Select "Dial number", then dial the telephone number using the virtual keypad.

Dial number

It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You can select "Dial from address book". The MyWay can record up to

4 000 entries.

Press the end of the steering mounted control for more than two seconds to gain access to the address book.

To delete a number, press the PHONE button then press and hold on a call number to display a list of actions including:

Delete entry

Delete list

09 CONFIGURATION

SETTING THE DATE AND TIME

These settings must be entered again if the battery has been disconnected.

Press the SETUP button.

Select the "Date & Time" function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Date & Time

Select the "Set date & time" function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Set date & time

Adjust the settings one by one using the direction arrows and con fi rm by means of the dial.

The SETUP function gives access to the following options: System language, Date & Time, Display (Brightness, Colour, Map colour), Vehicle,

Units, System.

Select the "Date format" function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Con fi rm the format required using the dial.

Select the "Time format" function and press the dial to con fi rm.

Con fi rm the format required using the dial.

Pressing the SETUP button for more than 2 seconds gives access to:

Description of the unit

GPS coverage

Demo mode

295

296

10 TRIP COMPUTER/VEHICLE PARAMETERS

TRIP COMPUTER A FEW DEFINITIONS

Press the MODE button several times in succession until the trip computer is displayed.

- The "vehicle" tab:

The range, the current fuel consumption and the distance remaining or the Stop & Start time counter.

- The "1" (trip 1) tab with:

The average speed, the average fuel consumption and the distance travelled calculated over trip "1".

- The "2" (trip 2) tab with the same functions for a second trip.

Each press of the button at the end of the wiper stalk displays the different trip computer information in succession, according to the screen.

Range: displays the distance which can travelled with the remaining fuel detected in the tank, based on the average fuel consumption over the last few miles (kilometres).

This displayed value may vary signi fi cantly following a change in the vehicle speed or the relief of the route.

When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed. After fi lling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).

If, whilst driving, dashes are displayed continuously in place of the digits, contact a CITROËN dealer.

Current fuel consumption: only calculated and displayed above

20 mph (30 km/h).

Average fuel consumption: this is the average fuel consumption since the last trip computer zero reset.

Distance travelled: calculated since the last trip computer zero reset.

Distance remaining to the destination: calculated with reference to the fi nal destination, entered by the user. If guidance is activated, the navigation system calculates it as a current value.

Average speed: this is the average speed calculated since the last trip computer zero reset (ignition on).

Stop & Start time counter

(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)

If your vehicle is fi tted with Stop & Start, a time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey.

It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.

11 SCREEN MENU MAP

MAIN FUNCTION

OPTION A

3 option A1

3 option A2

OPTION B...

Within 6 miles (10 km)

Within 30 miles (50 km)

Within 60 miles (100 km)

"Traffic" Menu

Messages on route

Only warnings on route

All warning messages

All messages

Geo. Filter

Within 2 miles (3 km)

Within 3 miles (5 km)

"Music" Menu

Select music

Sound settings

Balance/Fader

Bass/Treble

Equalizer

Linear

Classic

Jazz

Rock/Pop

Techno

Vocal

Loudness

Speed dependent volume

Reset sound settings

RADIO

"Radio" Menu

Waveband

Manual tune

Sound settings

Balance/Fader

Bass/Treble

Equalizer

Linear

297

Classic

Jazz

Rock/Pop

Techno

Vocal

Loudness

Speed dependent volume

Reset sound settings

"Navigation" Menu

Abort guidance/Resume guidance

Destination input

Enter new address

Country

City

Street

House number

298

Start route guidance

Postal code

Save to address book

Intersection

City district

Geo position

Map

Navigate HOME

Choose from address book

Choose from last destinations

TMC station information

Stopovers

Add stopover

Address input

Navigate HOME

Choose from address book

Choose from last destinations

Rearrange route

Replace stopover

Delete stopover

Recalculate

Fast route

Short route

Optimized route

POI search

POI nearby

POI near destination

POI in city

POI in country

POI near route

Route options

Route type

Fast route

Short route

Optimized route

Route dynamics

Traf fi c independent

Semi-dynamic

Avoidance criteria

Avoid motorways

Avoid toll roads

Avoid ferries

Recalculate

Settings

Navi volume

POI categories on Map

Set parameters for risk areas

Display on map

Visual alert

Sound alert

"Phone" Menu

Dial number

Dial from address book

Call lists

Connect phone

Search phone

Phones connected

Disconnect phone

Rename phone

Delete pairing

Delete all pairings

Show details

Settings

Select ring tone

Phone/Ring tone volume

Enter mailbox number

"SETUP" menu

System language *

Deutsch

English

Español

Français

Italiano

Nederlands

Polski

Portuguese

Date & Time *

Set date & time

Date format

Time format

* Available according to model.

299

300

Display

Brightness

Colour

Pop titanium

Toffee

Blue steel

Technogrey

Dark blue

Map colour

Day mode for map

Night mode for map

Auto. Day/Night for map

Vehicle *

Vehicle information

Alert log

Status of functions

Units

Temperature

Celsius

Fahrenheit

Metric/Imperial

Kilometres (Consumption: l/100)

Kilometres (Consumption: km/l)

Miles (Consumption: MPG)

System

Factory reset

Software version

Automatic scrolling

* Available according to model.

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD...).

For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,

Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,

CD...).

Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,

Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear

Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle position, select the Linear musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.

The CD player sound is poor.

The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.

The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio equipment.

The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.

The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.

- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the right way up.

- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be played if it is too damaged.

- Check the content in the case of a recorded

CD: consult the advice in the Audio section.

- The audio equipment's CD player does not play DVDs.

- Because of their quality level, certain writeable CDs will not be played by the audio system.

Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.

Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.

301

QUESTION ANSWER

The stored stations do not function (no sound,

87.5 Mhz is displayed...).

An incorrect waveband is selected.

SOLUTION

Press the BAND AST button to return to the waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the stations are stored.

The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.

The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function

(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).

The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park).

Activate the RDS function to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.

This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a failure of the audio equipment.

Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.

Sound cut-outs of 1 to

2 seconds in radio mode.

During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency permitting better reception of the station.

Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is too frequent and always on the same route.

With the engine off, the audio equipment switches off after a few minutes of use.

When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time depends on the battery charge.

The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery charge.

302

QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

TA is selected. However, certain traf fi c jams along the route are not indicated in real time.

On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the traf fi c information.

In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the traf fi c information.

Wait until the traf fi c information is being received correctly (displaying of the traf fi c information symbols on the map).

This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the traf fi c information available.

I receive a speed camera alert for a camera which is not on my route.

The system announces all speed cameras located in a conical zone forward of the vehicle. It may detect speed cameras on nearby or parallel roads.

Zoom the map to view the exact position of the speed camera.

Audible alerts are not active.

Activate audible alerts in Navigation Menu,

Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.

The audible speed camera alert is not working.

The alert volume level is set to minimum. Increase the speed camera alert volume.

The altitude is not displayed.

On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to receive more than 3 satellites correctly.

Wait until the system has started up completely.

Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least

3 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then select GPS coverage).

Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.

This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the conditions of reception of the

GPS signal.

The route is not calculated successfully.

The exclusion criteria may con fl ict with the current location (exclusion of toll roads on a motorway with tolls).

Check the exclusion criteria.

303

QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

There is a long waiting time after inserting a CD.

When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.

This phenomenon is normal.

I cannot connect my

Bluetooth telephone.

The telephone's Bluetooth function may be deactivated or the equipment may not be visible.

- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is activated.

- Check that your telephone is visible.

A telephone connected by Bluetooth is inaudible. The volume level depends on both the system and the telephone.

Increase the MyWay volume setting, possibly to maximum, and increase the telephone volume level if necessary.

304

Your Audio system is coded in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another vehicle, contact your CITROËN dealer for con fi guration of the system.

For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.

When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the audio equipment may switch off after a few minutes.

AUDIO SYSTEM

AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH

01 First steps

02 Steering mounted controls

03 Main menu

04 Audio

05 USB Box

06 Bluetooth functions

07 Configuration

08 Trip computer

09 Screen menu map

Frequently asked questions p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p.

306

307

308

309

312

315

317

318

319

323

305

01 FIRST STEPS

3 4

15 14

5 6 7

13 12

1. On/Off and volume adjustment.

3. Selection of the display on the screen from the following modes:

Audio (AUDIO), Trip Computer (TRIP) and

Telephone (TEL) functions.

4. Selection of source: radio, audio CD/MP3 CD, USB, Jack connection, Streaming.

5. Selection of FM1, FM2, FMast and AM wavebands.

6. Setting audio options: front/rear fader, left/ right balance, loudness, sound ambience.

7. Display the list of local stations, of the tracks on the CD or of the MP3 folders.

8. Abandon current operation.

9. TA fi c Announcement) function on/off.

Long press: access to the PTY (Types of radio programme) mode.

10. Con fi rmation.

11. Automatic search for a lower/higher frequency.

Selection of previous/next CD, MP3 or USB track.

12. Selection of a lower/higher radio frequency.

Selection of the previous/next MP3 folder.

Selection of the previous/next USB device folder/genre/artist/playlist.

13. Display the main menu.

14. Buttons 1 to 6:

Selection of a stored radio station.

Long press: store a station.

15. The DARK button changes the display on the screen to improve driving comfort at night.

1st press: lighting the upper band only.

2nd press: display of a black screen.

3rd press: return to the standard display.

306

02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

1. Activation/deactivation of the

Black Panel mode (night driving).

2. Pick up an incoming call/end a call which is in progress.

Open the telephone menu and display the calls list.

Long press: reject an incoming call.

3. Access to the short-cut menus depending on the display on the screen.

Con fi rmation of the function selected from a menu.

Rotation:

Selection of the previous/next stored RADIO station.

Selection of the previous/next CD or MP3 directory.

4. Abandon the current operation.

Reject an incoming call.

Long press: return to the main display.

5. Access to the main menu.

8. Mute.

9. RADIO: automatic search for a lower/higher frequency.

CD/MP3: selection of the previous/next track. continuous press: fast forward/rewind play.

10. RADIO: display the list of stations available.

Long press: update the list of radio stations.

CD/MP3: display the list of CD and folder tracks.

LIST

MENU

307

03 MAIN MENU

AUDIO FUNCTIONS : radio,

CD, USB, options.

> MONOCHROME SCREEN C

TELEPHONE : Bluetooth hands-free, pairing, management of a call.

308

TRIP COMPUTER : entering of distances, alerts, status of functions.

> MONOCHROME SCREEN A

PERSONALISATION-

CONFIGURATION : vehicle parameters, display, languages.

For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the

"Screen menu map" section.

04 AUDIO

RADIO

SELECTING A STATION

Press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select the radio.

Press the BAND AST button to select a waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM.

Brie fl y press one of the buttons to carry out an automatic search of the radio stations.

Press one of the buttons to carry out a manual search of the radio stations.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of stations received locally (30 stations maximum).

To update this list, press for more than two seconds.

The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, ...) may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure of the audio equipment.

RDS

Press the MENU button.

Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS then press OK.

Select the FM WAVEBAND

PREFERENCES function then press OK.

Select ACTIVATE RDS then press OK.

RDS appears on the screen.

The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative fequencies.

However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

309

310

04 AUDIO

RECEIVING TA MESSAGES

Press the TA button to activate or deactivate traf fi c messages.

CD

PLAYING A CD

Insert circular compact discs only.

Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may cause faults which are no re fl ection on the quality of the original player.

Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play begins automatically.

To play a disc which has already been inserted, press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select CD.

Press one of the buttons to select a track on the CD.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks on the CD.

Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or backward.

04 AUDIO

MP3 CD

PLAYING AN MP3 COMPILATION

Insert an MP3 compilation in the player.

The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which may take anything between a few seconds and several tens of seconds, before play begins.

On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 fi les spread over 8 folder levels. However, it is advisable to keep to a limit of two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is played.

While the CD is being played, the folder structure is not followed.

All of the fi les are displayed on a single level.

To play a disc which has already been inserted, press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select CD.

Press one of the buttons to select a track on the CD.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of directories of the MP3 compilation.

Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or backward play.

MP3 CD

INFORMATION AND ADVICE

The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3, is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of several tens of music fi les on a single disc.

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording, the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet fi le format is recommended.

If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played correctly.

It is recommended that the same recording format is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible

(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.

In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet format is recommended.

The audio system will only play fi les with the extension ".mp3" with a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of fi le

(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters without using special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying problems.

Empty CDs are not recognised and may damage the system.

311

05 USB BOX

USING THE USB BOX

This unit consists of a USB port and an auxiliary

Jack socket * . The audio fi les are transmitted from portable equipment such as a digital player or a USB memory stick to your Audio system to be listened to via the vehicle's speakers.

312

USB memory stick (1.1, 1.2 and 2.0) or iPod ® generation 5 or later:

- USB memory sticks should be formatted

FAT or FAT 32 (NTFS not supported),

- navigation through the fi le database is by means of the steering mounted controls, iPod updated for the best connection.

Other iPod ® players of earlier generations and players using the MTP protocol * :

- play via Jack-Jack lead only (not supplied),

- navigation through the fi le database is from the portable device.

The list of compatible equipment and the compression rates supported are available from CITROËN dealers.

CONNECTING A USB MEMORY STICK

Connect the memory stick to the port, directly or using a lead. If the audio equipment is switched on, the USB source is detected as soon as it is connected. Play begins automatically after a delay which depends on the capacity of the USB memory stick.

The fi le formats recognised are .mp3 (mpeg1 layer 3 only), .wma (standard 9 only, 128 kbits/sec compression), .wav and .ogg.

The playlists types accepted are m3u, .pls, .wpl.

The system puts together playlists (temporary memory) created over a period which depends on the capacity of the USB device.

The other sources are available during this time.

The playlists are updated each time the ignition is switched off or each time a USB memory stick is connected.

When connecting for the fi rst time, the classi fi cation suggested is by folder. When you reconnect, the classi fi cation selected previously is retained.

* According to vehicle.

05 USB BOX

USING THE USB PORT

Press and hold LIST to display the different classi fi cations.

Select by Folder/Artist/Genre/Playlist, press OK to select the classi fi cation required, then press OK again to con fi rm.

- by Folder: all folders containing audio fi les recognised on the peripheral device, classi fi ed in alphabetical order without following the fl ow chart.

- by Artist: all of the artist names de fi ned in the ID3 Tags, classi fi ed in alphabetical order.

- by Genre: all of the genres de fi ned in the ID3 Tags.

- by Playlist: in accordance with the playlists recorded on the USB device.

Press LIST brie fl y to display the previously selected classi fi cation.

Navigate through the list using the left/ right and up/down buttons.

Con fi rm the selection by pressing OK.

Press one of these buttons to gain access to the previous/next track on the classi fi cation list currently being played.

Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or backward play.

Press one of these buttons to gain access to the previous/next Genre,

Folder, Artist or Playlist on the classi fi cation list currently being played.

CONNECTING AN iPOD ® VIA THE USB PORT

The lists available are Artist, Genre and Playlist (as de fi ned on the iPod ® ).

Selection and Navigation are described in steps 1 to 5 above.

Do not connect a hard disk or USB devices other than audio equipment to the USB port. This could damage your installation.

313

314

05 USB BOX

USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX)

JACK SOCKET OR USB PORT (according to vehicle)

The auxiliary input, JACK or USB, allows the connection of portable equipment (MP3 player...).

Do not connect a single piece of equipment via the JACK socket and the USB port at the same time.

Connect the portable equipment

(MP3 player…) to the JACK socket or to the USB port, using a suitable cable (not supplied).

ADJUSTING THE VOLUME

OF THE AUXILIARY SOURCE

First adjust the volume of your portable device.

Then adjust the volume of your audio system.

Press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select AUX.

The display and control is via the portable device.

06 BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS

BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

SCREEN C

(AVAILABILITY DEPENDS ON MODEL AND VERSION)

The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used.

Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to fi nd out which services are available to you. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of services is available from the network. Consult a CITROËN dealer.

PAIRING A TELEPHONE The TELEPHONE menu permits access to the following functions in particular: Directory * , Call list, Pairing management.

* If your telephone is fully compatible.

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio equipment must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

6 Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one telephone can be connected at a time.

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.

Press the MENU button.

A virtual keypad is displayed on the screen: enter a code with at least

4 digits.

Con fi rm by pressing OK.

A message is displayed on the screen of the telephone chosen: to accept the pairing, enter the same code on the telephone, then con fi rm by pressing OK.

In the menu, select:

- Bluetooth telephone function -

Audio

- Bluetooth fi guration

- Perform a Bluetooth search

A window is displayed with "Searching...".

If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limited.

"Pairing of Name_telephone successful" appears on the screen.

The automatic connection authorised is only active after the telephone has been con fi gured.

The directory and the call list can be accessed after the synchronisation period.

The fi rst 4 telephones recognised are displayed in this window. The pairing can also be initiated from the telephone.

315

06 BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS

RECEIVING A CALL

1 An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display on the multifunction screen.

Select the YES tab on the display using the buttons and con fi rm by pressing OK.

Press the steering mounted control OK to accept the call.

MAKING A CALL

1 From the Bluetooth telephone function Audio menu, select Manage the telephone call then Call, Call list or Directory.

316

Press the end of the steering mounted control for more than two seconds to gain access to your directory.

To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad, with the vehicle stationary.

BLUETOOTH AUDIO STREAMING

Wireless transmission of the telephone's music fi les via the audio equipment. The telephone must be able to manage the appropriate bluetooth pro fi les (Pro fi les A2DP/AVRCP).

Initiate the pairing between the telephone and the vehicle. This pairing can be initiated from the vehicle's telephone function menu or via the telephone's keypad. See steps 1 to 10 on the previous pages. During the pairing phase, the vehicle must be stationary with the key in the ignition.

Select the telephone to be connected from the telephone function menu.

The audio system connects to a newly paired telephone automatically.

3 Activate the streaming source by pressing the SOURCE button * . The tracks to be played can be controlled as usual via the buttons on the

Radio control panel and the steering mounted controls ** . The contextual information can be displayed on the screen.

* In certain cases, playing of the Audio fi les must be initiated from the keypad.

** If the telephone supports the function.

07 CONFIGURATION

SETTING THE DATE AND TIME

SCREEN C

Press the MENU button.

Using the arrows, select

PERSONALISATION

CONFIGURATION.

Press to con fi rm the selection.

Using the arrows, select DISPLAY

CONFIGURATION.

Press to con fi rm the selection.

Using the arrows, select ADJUST

DATE AND TIME.

Press to con fi rm the selection.

Adjust the settings one by one con fi rming by pressing the OK button. Next select the OK tab on the screen then con fi rm.

317

08 TRIP COMPUTER

Each press of the button, located at the end of the wiper stalk, displays the different trip computer information in succession, depending on the screen.

● the range, the current fuel consumption and the distance remaining to the destination or the Stop & Start time counter,

- the "1" tab (trip 1) with:

● the average speed, the average consumption and the distance travelled calculated over trip " 1 " ,

- the "2" tab (trip 2) with the same information for a second trip.

Zero reset

When the required trip is displayed, press the control for more than two seconds.

A FEW DEFINITIONS

Range: displays the distance which can travelled with the remaining fuel detected in the tank, based on the average fuel consumption over the last few miles (kilometres).

This displayed value may vary signi fi cantly following a change in the vehicle speed or the relief of the route.

When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed.

After fi lling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).

If, whilst driving, dashes are displayed continuously in place of the digits, contact a CITROËN dealer.

Current fuel consumption: only calculated and displayed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Average fuel consumption: this is the average fuel consumption since the last trip computer zero reset.

Distance travelled: calculated since the last trip computer zero reset.

Distance remaining to the destination: calculated with reference to the fi nal destination, entered by the user. If guidance is activated, the navigation system calculates it as a current value.

Average speed: this is the average speed calculated since the last trip computer zero reset (ignition on).

Stop & Start time counter

(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)

If your vehicle is fi tted with Stop & Start, a time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey.

It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.

318

09 SCREEN MENU MAP

MONOCHROME A

RADIO-CD

RDS SEARCH

REG MODE

CD REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

VEHICLE CONFIG *

REV WIPE ACT

GUIDE LAMPS

MAIN FUNCTION

CHOICE A

Choice A1

Choice A2

CHOICE B...

OPTIONS

DIAGNOSTICS

CONSULT

ABANDON

UNITS

TEMPERATURE: °CELSIUS/°FAHRENHEIT

FUEL CONSUMPTION:

KM/L - L/100 - MPG

DISPLAY ADJUST

YEAR

MONTH

DATE

HOUR

MINUTES

12 H/24 H MODE

LANGUAGE

FRANCAIS

ITALIANO

NEDERLANDS

PORTUGUES

PORTUGUES-BRASIL

DEUTSCH

ENGLISH

ESPANOL

* The parameters vary according to vehicle.

319

320

09 SCREEN MENU MAP

MONOCHROME C

Press the OK dial for access to short-cut menus according to the display on the screen:

RADIO

1 activate/deactivate RDS

1 activate/deactivate REG mode

1 activate/deactivate radiotext

CD/MP3 CD

1 activate/deactivate Intro

1 activate/deactivate track repeat

(the entire current CD for CD, the entire current folder for MP3 CD)

1 activate/deactivate random play

(the entire current CD for CD, the entire current folder for MP3 CD)

USB

activate/deactivate track repeat (of the current folder/artist/genre/playlist)

1 activate/deactivate random play (of the current folder/artist/genre/playlist)

09 SCREEN MENU MAP

MONOCHROME C

Pressing the MENU button displays:

AUDIO FUNCTIONS

FM BAND PREFERENCES

3 alternative frequencies (RDS)

activate/deactivate

3 regional mode (REG)

activate/deactivate

3 radio-text information (RDTXT)

activate/deactivate

PLAY MODES

3 album repeat (RPT)

activate/deactivate

3 track random play (RDM)

activate/deactivate

TRIP COMPUTER

ENTER DISTANCE TO DESTINATION

Distance: x miles

ALERT LOG

Diagnostic s

STATUS OF THE FUNCTIONS *

Functions activated or deactivated

* The parameters vary according to vehicle.

PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION

DEFINE THE VEHICLE PARAMETERS *

DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

3 video brightness adjustment

normal video

inverse video

brightness (- +) adjustment

3 date and time adjustment

3 day/month/year adjustment

hour/minute adjustment

choice of 12 h/24 h mode

3 choice of units

l/100 km - mpg - km/l

°Celsius/°Fahrenheit

CHOICE OF LANGUAGE

321

09 SCREEN MENU MAP

BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

BLUETOOTH CONFIGURATION

Connect/Disconnect a device

Telephone function

Audio Streaming function

Consult the paired device

Delete a paired device

Perform a Bluetooth search

CALL

Calls list

EXTERIOR (SALOON)

Remote control key....................... 69-74

- opening/closing

- starting

- battery

Very cold climate screen.................. 205

Exterior lighting controls ............... 88-91

Headlamp adjustment........................ 91

Changing bulbs......................... 183-187

- foglamps

- direction indicator repeaters

Lane departure warning system ...... 156

Door mirrors ....................................... 67

Doors ............................................ 79-80

- opening/closing

Child lock ..........................................115

Electric windows ........................... 77-78

Tyre under-in fl ation detection ....117-118

Braking assistance ...........................119

Trajectory control ............................. 120

Tyre pressures ................................. 223

Accessories ..................................... 207

Panoramic sunroof ............................ 84

Roof bars ......................................... 203

Fuel tank ............................................ 86

Tailgate .............................................. 81

Temporary puncture repair kit ... 176-178

Changing a wheel ..................... 179-182

- tools

- removing

Front and/or rear visual and audible parking sensors ............................... 159

Towbar ............................................. 202

Towing ...................................... 200-201

Changing bulbs......................... 187-191 lamps

- 3rd brake lamp

- number plate lamps

325

326

V I S U A L S E A R C H

EXTERIOR (TOURER)

Remote control key....................... 69-74

- opening/closing

- starting

- battery

Very cold climate screen.................. 205

Exterior lighting controls ............... 88-91

Headlamp adjustment........................ 91

Changing bulbs......................... 183-187

- foglamps

- direction indicator repeaters

Lane departure warning system ...... 156

Door mirrors ....................................... 67

Doors ............................................ 79-80

- opening/closing

Child lock ..........................................115

Electric windows ........................... 77-78

Tyre under-in fl ation detection ....117-118

Braking assistance ...........................119

Trajectory control ............................. 120

Tyre pressures ................................. 223

Accessories ..................................... 207

Panoramic sunroof ............................ 85

Roof bars ......................................... 203

Fuel tank ............................................ 86

Tailgate .............................................. 82

Temporary puncture repair kit ... 176-178

Changing a wheel ..................... 179-182

- tools

- removing

Front and/or rear visual and audible parking sensors ............................... 159

Towbar ............................................. 202

Towing ...................................... 200-201

Changing bulbs......................... 189-191 lamps

- 3rd brake lamp

- number plate lamps

V I S U A L S E A R C H

INTERIOR

Side blinds ....................................... 102 Front seats.................................... 62-65

Rear seats .................................... 65-66

Boot fi ttings (Saloon) ....................... 103 rings

Boot fi ttings (Tourer) ........................ 104 rings

- hooks

Load space cover (Tourer)............... 105

Luggage retaining net

(Tourer) ..................................... 105-106

Airbags ..................................... 124-127

Glove box ........................................ 100

Child seats ................................ 107-110

Iso fi x mountings......................... 111-114

Seat belts.................................. 121-123

327

V I S U A L S E A R C H

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instrument panels .............................. 26

Warning lamps .............................. 32-38

Indicators ...................................... 39-41

Gear ef fi ciency indicator .................. 138

Buttons .............................................. 42 recorder

Parking space sensors .................... 157

Dashboard fuses ...................... 193-195

Windows ....................................... 77-78

Door mirrors ....................................... 67

Opening the bonnet ......................... 164

Steering wheel adjustment ................ 68

328

"Hydractive III +" electronic suspension ...................................... 160

Manual/electronic/automatic gearboxes .......... 137, 139-142, 146-149

Hill start assist ................................. 136

Courtesy lamps............................. 96-97

Rear view mirror ........................... 67-68

Interior mood lighting ......................... 98

Sun visor.......................................... 100

Parking brake, manual..................... 128

Parking brake, electric .............. 129-135

Stop & Start ..................................... 143

Multifunction screens .................... 43-48

Hazard warning lamps ......................116

Interior fi ttings ........................... 100-102 box

- mats...

Ventilation ..................................... 49-50

Mono-zone digital air conditioning .................................. 51-53

Dual-zone digital air conditioning .... 54-57

Programmable heating ................. 58-61

Emergency or assistance call .................. 116, 225-227

NaviDrive 3D ................................... 229

Setting the date/time........................ 261

MyWay ............................................. 273

Setting the date/time........................ 295

Audio system ................................... 305

Setting the date/time........................ 317

STEERING MOUNTED

CONTROLS

Lighting ......................................... 88-91

- sidelamps/dipped beam headlamps

- main beam headlamps

Automatic illumination of headlamps ... 90

Daytime running lamps ...................... 90

Headlamp adjustment........................ 91

Speed limiter............................. 152-153

Cruise control ........................... 154-155

V I S U A L S E A R C H

Fixed centred controls steering wheel .......................... 150-151

Trip computer ............................... 29-30

Automatic rain sensitive wipers ......... 95

Wash-wipe ......................................... 95

Audio system controls ..................... 151

Wipers .......................................... 94-95

Horn ..................................................116

Steering wheel adjustment ................ 68

329

V I S U A L S E A R C H

TECHNICAL DATA - MAINTENANCE

Running out of fuel - Diesel ............. 166

Petrol engines.................................. 209

Petrol weights ........................... 210-211

Diesel engines .......................... 212-213

Diesel weights .......................... 214-217

Commercial versions (Tourer) weights... 218

Dimensions (Saloon) ................ 219-220

Dimensions (Tourer) ................. 221-222

Identi fi cation markings ..................... 223

Very cold climate protection............. 204

Checking components .............. 174-175

- battery

Checking the levels .................. 172-173

- oil

- coolant

Engine compartment fuses ................................. 193, 196-197

330

Changing bulbs......................... 183-192

- front

- rear

Opening the bonnet ......................... 164

Petrol under-bonnet layout ....... 167-168

Diesel under-bonnet layout....... 169-171

Battery ...................................... 198-199

Energy economy mode.................... 200

A ABS and EBFD systems ....... 119

Accessories

Accessory socket, 12 volt ...... 102 headlamps

Adjusting head restraints ................ 62, 65

Adjusting seat belt height ...... 122

Adjusting the steering wheel ..... 68

Airbags, curtain ............. 126, 127 front

Airbags, lateral .............. 126, 127

Air conditioning ...... 24, 50, 51, 54

Air conditioning, digital ............ 54

Air conditioning, mono-zone .... 51

Air diffuser

Air adjustment ....................... 52, 55 fi fl

lter .................................. 174

Air

Air fl ow adjustment ............ 52, 56

Air ................................. 51

Air recirculation ................. 52, 56

Air vents ............................ 49, 50

Alarm

Alert/warning

Alloy log

.......................... 206

Anti-lock braking system

(ABS) ................................... 119

Anti-pinch .................... 77, 84, 85

.................................. 71

Armrest, front

Armrest, ......................... 102

Assistance call ...... 116, 226, 227 warning

Audio/video

Audio sockets streaming

(Bluetooth) ........................... 316

Audio system ..........................305-324

A L P H A B E T I C A L I N D E X

A Automatic illumination of headlamps ................... 88, 90

Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps ..................... 116

Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers ........... 94, 95

B Battery ........................... 174, 198

Battery, ................... 199

Battery, remote control ...... 73, 74

Blind for panoramic sunroof .... 85

Blinds

Bluetooth

(hands-free) ......... 257, 293, 315

Bluetooth

(telephone) .......... 257, 293, 315

Bonnet

Boot

........................... 164

( fi ttings) ................. 103, 104 discs

Brake lamps .................. 187, 189 pads

................................... 175

Braking assistance system .... 119

C Capacity, fuel tank ................... 86

CD MP3 ......... 253, 290, 291, 311

Central locking .................. 70, 79

Changing a bulb ...........................183-192

Changing a fuse ............ 193, 197

Changing a wheel ..........179-182

Changing a wiper blade .......... 96

Changing the date .... 261, 295, 317

Changing the remote control battery ....................... 73

C Changing the time ............... 261, 295, 317

CHECK .................................... 31

Checking ............. 172,

Checking the engine oil level.... 40

...........................164-175

Children .......... 108-115, 123, 125 seats

Child conventional ................ 109, 110

Child seats, Iso fi x .......... 113, 114

CITROËN call button ............ 116, 126, 227

CITROËN ................ 227

Closing the boot ...................... 70

Closing the doors .............. 70, 79

Cold climate screen ............... 205

Connectors, audio ........... 259, 292, 312, 314

Control for panoramic sunroof blind .......................... 85

Coolant level ................... 41, 172

Coolant indicator ................................. 41

Courtesy

Cruise ........................ 154

Cup holder ..................... 101, 102

D Date (display) ........ 261, 295, 317

Daytime running lamps ...... 90, 183

Deactivating the passenger airbag .................................. 125

.......................... 52,

Demisting

Demisting the rear screen ................ 53, 57

Diesel additive level .............. 173

Dimensions

Dipped beam ................... 88, 183

331

A L P H A B E T I C A L I N D E X

D Dipstick ............................ 40, 172

Directional lighting ............. 92, 93

Direction indicators ............. 116, 183, 189

Doors ....................................... 79

Doors emergency control ........ 80

Driving economically .............. 24 positions

(storing) ................................. 65

E EBA (Emergency braking assistance) .......................... 119

Eco-driving

Economy ..................... 200

Electric window controls .......... 77

Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) .............. 119

Electronic engine immobiliser .......... 71, 74

Emergency boot release ......... 81

Emergency braking system ..... 119

Emergency call ...... 116, 226, 227

Emergency warning lamps .... 116

Energy economy mode ......... 200

Engine, Diesel ................. 87, 169

Engine, petrol .................. 87, 167

Engine compartment ..... 167, 169 compartment fusebox ................................ 196

Engine oil level indicator ......................... 40, 172

......................... 209,

Environment ...... 24, 74, 173, 199

332

F Filling with fuel ................... 86, 87

Fitting a wheel ....................... 181

Fitting roof bars ..................... 203

F Fittings, boot .................. 103, 104

Flashing ................ 116

Foglamps, front ............... 89, 186

Foglamps, rear ........ 89, 187, 189

Folding the rear seats ............. 66 seats

Fuel ............................. 24,

Fuel

Fuel fl ap ..................... 86, 87 gauge

Fuel

Fusebox,

Fuses

........................... 86,

............. 193

.................................... 193

G G.P.S. ............................ 240, 279

Gearbox,

Gearbox, manual ........ 137, 138, 143, 175

Gear shift indicator ................ 138

Gear lever

Gear automatic gearbox ............... 146 lever, electronic gearbox system ..... 139 lever, manual gearbox .................. 137 box

Guidance

Guide-me-home

H Hands-free kit ................ 293, 315

Hazard warning lamps .......... 116 adjustment

Headlamps,

Headlamp directional

...................... 95

Headlamp wash reservoir ..... 172

H Head restraints, front ......... 62, 63

Head restraints, rear ......... 65, 66 seats

Heating .................. 24, 50, 51, 55

Height and reach adjustment, steering wheel ....................... 68

High load retaining net .......... 105

Hill start assist ....................... 136

...................................... 116

Hydractive III+ suspension .... 160

I Identi fi cation plates ............... 223

Indicator lamps, status .......32-38 direction

In fl ating tyres ......................... 223

Inputs for audio system ......... 256, 292, 312, 314

Instrument panel lighting ......... 42

Instrument panels

Instrument panel screen .................. 26, 138

Interior mood lighting ............... 98

ISOFIX child seats ................ 113

ISOFIX

J Jack

(copy)

Jukebox

K Keeping children safe .............. 108-115, 123, 125

Key with remote control ........................69-71, 74

L Labels, identi fi cation .............. 223

Lamps, warning and indicator ............................32-38

A L P H A B E T I C A L I N D E X

L Lane Departure Warning System

(LDWS) ............................... 156 brake

Level, headlamp wash .......... 172 and checks ..........................167-175

.................................... 98

Lighting, guide-me home ......... 71, 90, 91

Lighting,

Lighting

(replacement) ...............183-192

Lighting control stalk ............... 88

Lighting ....................... 42

Lighting on reminder ............... 89

................................... 24

Load space cover .................. 105

Locating your vehicle .............. 71

Locking from the inside ........... 79

M Main beam ...................... 88, 183

Maintenance

Map reading lamps .................. 96

Markings, fi cation .......... 223

Massage function ................... 64

Mat ........................................ 101

Menu, main ..................... 27, 308

Mirror, rear view ................ 67, 68

Mirrors,

Misfuel

Motorway function

(direction indicators) ............ 116 for

ISOFIX seats ....................... 111

MP3 CD ......... 253, 290, 291, 311

Multifunction

Music screen media players ................. 252, 290, 311

MyWay

N NaviDrive 3D ............47, 229-271

Number plate lamps .............. 191

O Oil fi lter .................................. 174

Oil level ........................... 40, 172

Oil temperature indicator ......... 41

Opening the bonnet ............... 164

Opening the boot ..................... 69

Opening the doors ............. 69, 79

Opening the fuel fi ller fl ap ....... 86

Opening the panoramic sunroof blind .......................... 85

Opening the sunroof ................ 84

Operation indicator lamps .................32-38

P Paint colour code .................. 223 matt

Panoramic glass sunroof ......... 85

Parking brake ........ 128, 129, 175

Parking brake, electric ........... 129

Parking sensors, rear ............ 159

Parking space sensor ........... 157

Passenger compartment fi lter ............... 174

Player,

CD MP3 ....... 253, 290, 291, 311

Port, USB ...... 101, 253, 292, 312

Priming the fuel system ......... 165

Protecting children .......... 108-115, 123, 125

R Radio ..................... 251, 289, 309

Reading lamps, rear ................ 96

Rear demisting .................. 52, 57

Recharging the battery .......... 199

Reinitialising the electric windows ................................ 77

Reinitialising the remote control ................. 73

Reinitialising the sunroof ......... 84

Remote

Removable

(snow shield) ....................... 205

Removing a wheel ................. 181

Removing the mat ................. 101

Repair kit, puncture ............... 176

Replacing bulbs .............................183-192

Replacing ..................... 193

Replacing the air fi lter ........... 174

Replacing the oil fi lter ............ 174

Replacing the passenger compartment fi lter ............... 174

Replacing wiper blades ........... 96

Resetting the service indicator .............. 40

Resetting the trip recorder ....... 42

Rev

Reversing

............................. 26

Roof

Routine lamp

............................... 203

.............. 174,

Running out of fuel

(Diesel) ................................ 165

S Safety for children ... 108-115, 123, 125

Screen, colour 16/9 ...... 235, 262,

276, 297

Screen, monochrome ....... 308, 319, 320

333

334

S Screen, monochrome C .......... 43

Screen, multifunction ............... 43 multifunction

(with audio equipment) .... 45, 47

Screen-wash

Screen map ............. 262, 297, 319, 320 fl front

Screenwash

Seat adjustment ................ 62, 63 belts

Seats,

Security ......................... 182

Serial number, vehicle ........... 223

Service indicator ................ 39, 40

Servicing 40

Setting the clock .... 261, 295, 317

Short-cut menus ............ 236, 277

Sidelamps ....... 88, 183, 187, 189

Ski repeater

SIM fl ap .................................. 100

SNOW

Spare wheel

Speed ......................... 152

Speedometer

Stability control (ESP) ........... 120

Starting the vehicle .......... 72, 139

Steering lock

Steering controls ................ 234, 275, 307 wheel, fi xed centred controls .......... 150

Stopping the vehicle ........ 72, 139

Stop & Start .......... 30, 53, 57, 86,

143, 164, 174, 198, 296, 318

Storage .......... 101

Storing driving positions .......... 65 rings

.................................... 84

A L P H A B E T I C A L I N D E X

S Sun visor ............................... 100

Suspension, electronic control ................. 160

Synchronising the remote control ................. 73

System, navigation ........ 240, 279

Systems, ASR and ESP ........ 120

T Table of weights ..... 210, 211, 214-218

Tables of engines ............ 209, 212, 218

Tables of fuses ...................... 193

Tank, ................................. 87

Technical ................209-223

Telephone ...... 227, 257, 293, 314 hands-free

Temperature,

Temperature

Temperature control for heated seats .................... 64

Temporary tyre repair kit ....... 176

Time ...................... 261, 295, 317

TMC fi c info) .......... 249, 287

...................................... 179

Total distance recorder ............ 42

................................... 202

Towing another vehicle .......... 200

Traction control (ASR) ........... 120

Traf fi c information

(TA) ............. 250, 288, 289, 310

Traf fi c information

(TMC) .......... 249, 250, 287, 288

Trip computer .................... 29, 30

Trip distance recorder ............. 42

Tyre

Tyres

Tyre fl ation detection .............................. 117

U Under-in fl ation (detection) ..... 117

Unlocking

Unlocking from the inside ........ 79

V Vehicle identi fi cation .............. 223

Ventilation 50

Very cold protection ............... 204

W Warning lamps ...................32-34

Wash-wipe, ...................... 94

Weights .......... 210, 211, 214-218

Welcome

Wheel,

Window

Wiper, controls

............................... 94

Wiper control stalk ............. 94, 95

X Xenon headlamps ................. 183

335

336

This handbook describes all of the equipment available in the whole range.

Your vehicle will be fi tted with some of this equipment described in this document, depending on its trim level, version and the speci fi cation for the country in which it is sold.

The descriptions and illustrations are given without any obligation. Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to modify the technical speci fi cations, equipment and accessories without having to update this edition of the handbook.

This document is an integral part of your vehicle.

It should be passed on to the new user in the event of sale or transfer.

Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application of the provisions of the European regulation

(Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this regulation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.

Reproduction or translation of all or part of this handbook is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles CITROËN.

For any work on your vehicle, use a quali fi ed workshop that has the technical information, competence and equipment required, which a

CITROËN dealer is able to provide.

Printed in the EU

Anglais

04-11

11.C5.0040

Anglais

2011 – DOCUMENTATION DE BORD

4Dconcept

Diadeis

Edipro

CRÉATIVE TECHNOLOGIE

Hello! I am an AI chatbot specifically trained to assist you with the C5 01/07/2011 - 31/05/2012 Owner Manual. I have thoroughly reviewed the document and can help you locate the exact information you need or explain the content in clear and simple terms. Whether you’re looking for guidance on specific features, troubleshooting steps, or general usage, feel free to ask your questions. The more details you provide about your concerns or needs, the more accurately and effectively I can assist you!

Assistant typing

Assistant terminated